Specifications | Buick Automobile Automobile User Manual

2008 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-9
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-29
Airbag System
......................................... 1-54
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-68
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-11
Windows ................................................. 2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-20
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-24
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-41
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-43
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-47
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-52
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-54
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-20
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-30
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-49
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-84
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-27
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-56
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-58
Windshield Replacement
........................... 5-62
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-62
Tires
...................................................... 5-63
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-99
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-107
Electrical System
.................................... 5-108
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-116
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
........... 7-17
Index ................................................................ 1
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK,
the BUICK Emblem, and the name LACROSSE are
registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after
that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in this
manual.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15864654 A First Printing
ii
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-6
Center Seat ...................................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-8
Safety Belts .....................................................1-9
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-27
Lap Belt ......................................................1-28
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-29
Child Restraints .............................................1-29
Older Children ..............................................1-29
Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-39
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-50
Airbag System ...............................................1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-59
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-60
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-60
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-67
Restraint System Check ..................................1-68
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-69
1-1
Front Seats
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
Power Seats
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
1-2
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with this
feature, the buttons are
located on the climate
control panel.
On seats with power lumbar, the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front of the control to increase lumbar support.
Press the rear of the control to decrease lumbar support.
Press the button once to activate the high heat setting.
Both indicator lights on the button will come on. Press the
button again to select the lower temperature setting. Only
one indicator light will come on. Press the button a third
time to turn the heat off.
This feature only works when the ignition is on.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-4
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press the button, located
on the top of the seatback, and push the head
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is
at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
1-6
Center Seat
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. There are
cupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To use
them, raise the seat cushion. This seat can also be
converted to a storage area by lowering the armrest.
See Center Console Storage on page 2-53.
1-7
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, both sides of the rear
seatback can be folded down. This gives direct access
to the trunk. Make sure the front seats are not reclined.
If they are, the rear seatback(s) may not fold down all
the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback,
pull the tab located on
the outboard side of
the seatback and fold
the seatback forward.
1-8
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback up until it
latches. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure
it is locked in position.
The seatbacks should be kept in the upright, locked
position when they are not being used to extend
the cargo area.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed. In
the same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-9
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-14
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder
except for the center front passenger position, if your
vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 1-28 for more information.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
1-22
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on
the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, press
down on the release
lever (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position. You can
move the height adjuster
up just by pressing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-69.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without squeezing the release lever to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-24
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-25
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-27
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-28
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the booster seat, state the weight and
height limitations for that booster.
1-29
Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the
child passes the below fit test:
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 1-22 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length of
trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
1-30
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
1-32
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if
a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.
1-33
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-34
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-37
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint. Because there are different
systems, it is important to refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint. Make
sure the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that restraint.
1-39
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for additional information.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in a
rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-40
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-41
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-42
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers
on the rear seatback filler panel. Flip open the cover to
access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-39 for
additional information.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
CAUTION:
1-44
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or
the seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-45
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
1-46
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-41 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-47
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-39.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-48
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
1-49
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the
frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a
child restraint in the center front seat. It is
always better to secure a child restraint in
a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-39.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34
for more information on this, including important safety
information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-41 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 for
top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-34.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-51
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-52
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-53
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-54
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or
leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover,
or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
1-55
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-29 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-33.
1-56
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33
for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-57
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-58
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 1-54. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag
should have inflated simply because of the damage to
a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the
vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment
is determined by the location and severity of the side
impact.
1-59
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body.
1-60
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 1-59 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using
the controls for those features.
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
1-61
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel
when you start your vehicle.
The words ON and OFF
will be visible during the
system check.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
If you are using remote start to start your vehicle from
a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
1-62
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position on page 1-50.
1-63
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-6.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to
be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind
you that the airbag is active.
1-64
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
1-65
The passenger sensing system may suppress the
airbag deployment when liquid soaks into the seat.
If this happens, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator and the airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will be lit. The system should resume
normal operation after the seat is allowed to dry.
If the system operates incorrectly after the seat has
dried, have your dealer/retailer check the system.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-66
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-16.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned
off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or
with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-62.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-67
Restraint System Check
Airbags
Checking the Restraint Systems
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more information.
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a
new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-102.
1-68
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary replacements
made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But
the belt assemblies that were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer
to have your safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33.
1-69
✍ NOTES
1-70
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8
Doors and Locks ............................................2-11
Door Locks ..................................................2-11
Power Door Locks ........................................2-11
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-12
Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-12
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Trunk ..........................................................2-14
Windows ........................................................2-17
Power Windows ............................................2-18
Sun Visors ...................................................2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-20
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-20
PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-22
PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-22
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-24
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-24
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-24
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-25
Starting the Engine .......................................2-26
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-27
Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-28
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-29
Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-33
Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-36
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-37
Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37
Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-38
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-39
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® ............................................2-39
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-40
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-41
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-41
OnStar® System .............................................2-43
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-47
Universal Home Remote System .....................2-47
Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-48
2-2
Storage Areas ................................................2-52
Glove Box ...................................................2-52
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-52
Center Console Storage .................................2-53
Convenience Net ..........................................2-54
Sunroof .........................................................2-54
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system.
The key has a transponder in the key head that matches
a decoder in the vehicle’s instrument panel. The key will
have PK3 stamped on it. If a replacement key or an
additional key is needed, it must be purchased from your
dealer/retailer or certified locksmith.
2-3
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® III
Operation on page 2-22 for more information on
programming a new key.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8 for
more information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away, however, the
operating range may be less while the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4.
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 2-8 for additional information.
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking
lamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred,
or the horn may chirp when Q is pressed again
within five seconds from the previous press of the lock
button. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additional
information. If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, pressing Q may also arm it. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-20.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining
doors will unlock. The interior lamps will come on and
stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps can
be programmed to come on for a set amount of time
when the vehicle is unlocked using the RKE transmitter.
See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76. If the vehicle has
the content theft-deterrent system, pressing " on the
RKE transmitter may disarm it. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-20.
2-5
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold V for
about one second to release the trunk lid. The
transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
L (Panic Alarm): Press L to activate the alarm. The
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly
for two minutes. The alarm will turn off when the
ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L is pressed again.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF or
ACC/ACCESSORY for the alarm to work.
2-6
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after the new transmitters
are re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW
message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATTERY
LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58
for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-7
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned to
ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is
low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additional
information.
2-8
/ (Remote Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or
until the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors
will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine
running time, or one start with a time extension. The
first start must expire or be canceled to get two separate
10 minute starts.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the
vehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch and
turned to ON/RUN.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must be
turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-24 for information regarding the
ignition positions on your vehicle.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.
The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
A door on the vehicle is open.
The vehicle’s hood is open.
The hazard warning flashers are on.
The check engine light is on. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-42
2-9
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display REMOTE
START DISABLED.
Vehicles that have the remote start feature are shipped
from the factory with the remote vehicle start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additional
2-10
information. If your vehicle does not have the DIC
feature, and remote vehicle start was installed at the
dealer/retailer, you will need to have the dealer/retailer
enable or disable the system.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Door Locks
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s door
lock cylinder briefly counterclockwise to unlock the
driver’s door. Turn and hold it to unlock all the doors.
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside use the manual or power door locks.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Power Door Locks
To lock or unlock all doors
from inside the vehicle,
use the power door
lock switch located on
either front door armrest.
Driver’s side shown
2-11
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors. Press
the top of the switch to unlock all doors.
Automatic Door Lock
If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
the vehicle is programmed to arm the system with the
power door lock switch. If your vehicle has a Driver
Information Center (DIC) this feature can be turned off.
See “Content Theft” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-76.
The vehicle’s doors are programmed to lock when the
shift lever is moved into a forward gear.
Delayed Locking
Your vehicle may have this feature. It delays the locking
of the vehicle’s doors for five seconds after the last door
is closed. Two chimes will sound when the power door
lock switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed when a door is open.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), a
Delayed Locking warning will be displayed.
The doors can be locked immediately by pressing the
power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the
transmitter a second time.
The delayed locking feature will not activate when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
You can program this feature on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped. See
“Delayed Locking” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-76.
2-12
If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle after
the doors have been locked, place the shift lever into
PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors using the power
door lock switch or unlock one door using the inside
manual door lock.
The automatic door lock feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factory
to unlock when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
there are different programming options for unlocking
the doors automatically. See DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-76.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks, that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to
access them.
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have
one of the following:
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door
lock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult
to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is open
while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be
locked with the power door lock switch.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never
be locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the
key could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always
remember to take the key with you.
2-13
Trunk
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.
2-14
Opening the Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more
information.
The ignition must be off, or the transmission must be in
PARK (P) to open the trunk.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
This feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside the
vehicle using the power door lock switch.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Press and hold the top of
the driver’s power door
lock switch to unlock
the trunk.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to unlock the trunk.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the trunk latch of the trunk lid.
This handle will glow following exposure to light. If ever
needed, pull the emergency trunk release handle to
open the trunk from the inside.
2-15
Trunk Lid Pull Down Handle and
Tie-Down Features
Your vehicle has a trunk lid pull down handle (A)
located on the inside of the trunk lid on the driver’s side
of the vehicle. Use the handle to pull down the trunk
lid when closing it.
On vehicles with a tie-down feature (B), it is located
inside the trunk lid on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
and can be used to secure the trunk lid when large
items are stored in the trunk.
2-16
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-17
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-18
The switches on the driver’s door armrest are used
to control each of the windows. The power window
switches work while the ignition is in ON/RUN,
ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-25. Each passenger door
has its own window switch.
To lower the window, press and hold the front of the
switch to the first position until the window is at
the desired level. To raise the window, pull up and
hold the front of the switch.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the window
completely without holding the switch. Press the front of
the switch to the second position and release.
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. They
can be detached from the center retainer and slid along
the rod to cover different areas of the front window
and turned to cover the side windows.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull up
on the switch.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Window Lockout
Swing down the sun visors and lift the cover to expose
the vanity mirror. Do not drive with the cover lifted
due to possible glare impeding other drivers behind or
to the side of the vehicle.
o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window switches
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows and the front passenger can control their
own window with the lockout on. Press the left side of
the switch to return to normal window operation. A
red bar on the right side of the switch indicates that the
lockout is off.
2-19
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Your vehicle may have a
red light located on top of
the instrument panel,
toward the center of the
vehicle and near the
windshield, that will flash
slowly when the system is
armed.
2-20
The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to be activated
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
“CONTENT THEFT” under “Customization Menu Items”
in DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76. While
armed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lock
switch. The remote alarm will sound if someone tampers
with the trunk or enters the vehicle without using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or key to unlock
the doors. The horn will sound and the headlamps will
flash for up to two minutes. The system will also cut off
the fuel supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
The vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm system can be
activated when the key is removed from the ignition and
the power door lock switch of either the driver’s or front
passenger’s door is used to lock the vehicle. The door
needs to be in the open position when pressing the power
door lock switch. The system will not arm if the door is
closed when the power door lock switch is pressed. This
system can be activated through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “CONTENT THEFT” under
“Customization Menu Items” in DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76.
When the doors are locked using the power door lock
switch of either front door, the red light, if your vehicle has
one, will start flashing at a fast rate, indicating that the
system is arming. After all the doors are locked there will
be a time delay and then the red light, if your vehicle has
one, will begin to flash at a very slow rate, indicating the
system is armed.
Arming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will arm when the RKE transmitter is
used to lock the doors after the key is removed from
the ignition. The red light, if your vehicle has one,
will come on to indicate that the system is arming. After
all doors are closed and locked, and after a time
delay, the red light, if your vehicle has one, will begin
flashing at a very slow rate to show the system is armed.
Disarming with the RKE Transmitter
The alarm system will disarm when the RKE transmitter
is used to unlock the doors. The red light, if your
vehicle has one, will go out to show that the system is
disarmed.
Disarming with Your Key
The alarm system will disarm when the key is used
to unlock the doors. The red light, if your vehicle has
one, will stop flashing when the system is disarmed.
If you would like the key to disarm the alarm system,
see “CONTENT THEFT” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76 for more information.
Arming Confirmation
Your vehicle may have a red light located on top of the
instrument panel, towards the center of the vehicle
and near the windshield, that will flash slowly to confirm
when the system is armed.
2-21
PASS-Key® III
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-22
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III® uses a transponder in the ignition
key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that the wrong
key has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down the
vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not
work and fuel will stop flowing to the engine. If someone
tries to start the vehicle again with the wrong key, the
vehicle will not start. Anyone using a trial-and-error
method to start the vehicle will be discouraged to do so
because of the high number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the STARTING DISABLED warning message
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, there
may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be
undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-109. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III to have
a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-8 for more information.
®
It is possible for the PASS-Key III decoder to accept
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the programmed keys are lost or do
not operate, see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
To program the new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the master key in the ignition and start
the engine. If the engine will not start, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of removing the
original key.
5. The SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message
on the DIC will turn off, once the key has been
programmed. It may not be apparent that the
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message went
on due to how quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message
appears and stays on the DIC while the vehicle is being
driven, the engine will be able to be restarted if it is turned
off. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
The vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III system
at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, see your
dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
2-23
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the
ignition, the key can be
turned to four different
positions.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-28 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-24
In order to shift out of PARK (P), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
ignition key can be inserted or removed. This position
locks the ignition and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent
feature.
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to left
and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio and
windshield wipers operate while the engine is off. To
use ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.
C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns to
after the vehicle is started. This position displays
some of the warning and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A warning chime will sound and the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
when the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is in
the ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58 for more information.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key in
the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound,
when you open the driver’s door. Always remember to
remove your key from the ignition and take it with you.
This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
Power to these accessories continues to work for
10 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-25
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
2-26
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up
and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
2-27
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is attached to the underside of the diagonal
brace, which is located above the engine air
cleaner/filter assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-28
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
Active Fuel Management™
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on your driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle’s automatic
transmission may have a
shift lever on the steering
column or on the console
between the seats.
There is also a display
located on the instrument
panel cluster that
indicates the vehicle’s gear
position.
Console Shift Lever
2-29
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.
The positions for the shift lever are:
PARK (P): This position locks the vehicle’s front
wheels. It is the best position to use when the engine is
started because the vehicle cannot move easily.
2-30
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. You must fully apply the regular
brakes before shifting from PARK (P) when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting
Out of PARK (P) on page 2-35
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to get it out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or
Snow on page 4-20.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is
moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase
speed may damage the transmission. Have your
vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in
SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If more
power is needed for passing, and the vehicle is:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down.
By doing this the vehicle will automatically shift down
to the next gear and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D)
without using your brakes. You might choose THIRD
(3) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding
roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears and when going down a steep hill.
2-31
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transmission. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D)
instead of SECOND (2).
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can
use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes. You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-32
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right
foot. Push down the
parking brake pedal with
your left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. While you lift your
left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
A warning chime will sound and PARKING BRAKE ON
will display in the DIC if the parking brake is set, the
ignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8km/h). For more information see Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-37 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Steering Column Shift Lever
If your vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use this
procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-28. That section shows what
to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32 for more information.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-28.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-33
Console Shift Lever
If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,
use this procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle
and then to the left.
3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32 for more information.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. See
Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more information.
2-34
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P)
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK
(P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the
regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock is always functional except in the case of
a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-50.
2-35
Console Shift
If your console shift lever cannot be moved out of
PARK (P)
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN position. See Ignition
Positions on page 2-24 for more information.
3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shift
lever is pushed all the way into PARK (P).
3. Shift out of the PARK (P) position to the
NEUTRAL (N) position.
4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking Over Things That Burn
4. Press the shift lever button
5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Column Shift
If your column shift lever cannot be moved out of
PARK (P)
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. See
Ignition Positions on page 2-24 for more information.
2-36
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-17.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
2-37
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-33.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the
lamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
Manual Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
The vehicle may have a mirror with Onstar®. While sitting
in a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so you
can see clearly behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the
center to move it up and down and side to side.
The mirror has a day/night control located at the bottom.
Turn the control to the right for the night position to
reduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps. Turn the
control to the front for the day position.
2-38
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-43 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust
the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.
Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down
and side to side.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror that darkens gradually to reduce the glare of
headlamps from behind. Press the AUTO button located
in the lower center of the mirror to turn automatic
dimming on and the ( (off) button located next to the
AUTO button to turn automatic dimming off.
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when it
is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facing
rearward, senses headlamps behind you.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust
the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.
Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down
and side to side.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with the OnStar® System. The automatic dimming
feature is turned on or off by pressing the left button,
located on the lower part of the mirror, for up to
three seconds. When turned on, this mirror functions
like the automatic dimming rearview mirror described
previously. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on
page 2-39.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-43 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
2-39
Outside Power Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors, are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
For information on the operation of the outside power
mirrors see Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-40.
If the vehicle has heated mirrors, they will warm up to
melt ice and snow, and remove condensation when the
defroster is turned on. See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-24 or Climate Control System
on page 3-20.
Outside Convex Mirror
Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. To adjust a
mirror, use the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle
and the area behind it can be seen while sitting in a
comfortable driving position. Keep the selector switch in
the center position when not adjusting either outside
mirror.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
2-40
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid other
vehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speeds
less than 3 mph (5 km/h). It can determine how
close objects are to the rear bumper, up to 5 feet (1.5 m)
behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are located
on the rear bumper.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It
cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA, always check
behind your vehicle before backing up. While
backing, be sure to look for objects and check
your vehicle’s mirrors.
The display is located
above the rear window and
can be seen by looking
over your right shoulder.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
2-41
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R). The rear display will
then briefly illuminate to let you know the system is
working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). If you are above this speed, the red light on
the rear display will flash.
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from your rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Repeated beeping will occur when you are
closer than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
2-42
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as you get closer to a detected object:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red
lights/continuous beep
amber/amber/red
lights flashing and
continuous beep
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean, a red URPA
display light may illuminate when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). Keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions,
see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-102.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle
or an object was hanging out of your trunk during
your last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate.
Once the attached object is removed, URPA
will return to normal operation.
OnStar® System
• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
2-43
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
2-44
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend this
plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions
& Connections Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an
OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentary
minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only available in the
continental U.S.).
(If equipped)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-45
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-102 for
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of
recording and transmitting vehicle information. This
information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call
Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the accident that your
vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
2-46
Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your
vehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,
this means that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment is
active.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2-47
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
2-48
When programming a garage door, park outside of the
garage. Park directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be
sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the
device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
To program up to three devices:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Programming can only occur with the vehicle in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off.
2. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons.
3. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
2-49
4. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button that you would like to use to
control the garage door and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter
button until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
5. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
6. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming Steps
6 through 8.
2-50
7. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button
may vary by manufacturer.
8. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
9. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two
seconds, and then release it. If the garage door
does not move, press and hold the same button a
second time for two seconds, and then release
it. Again, if the door does not move, press and hold
the same button a third time for two seconds,
and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener by
using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step
3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the
Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from the
Universal Home Remote buttons.
Using Universal Home Remote
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or
go to www.homelink.com.
Operation can only occur with the vehicle in
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
2-51
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2-52
Cupholder(s)
If your vehicle is the
five-passenger model,
there is a cupholder in front
of the center console.
The cupholder has an arm that adjusts to two positions
to fit either a large cup or two smaller cups.
Center Console Storage
If your vehicle has a five-passenger console, the center
console has a padded lid that can be used as an
armrest. Lift the armrest lid to access a storage bin with
a coin holder and a CD holder. Located under the lid
is a card clip.
If your vehicle has a six-passenger console, there is a
flip and fold center armrest that allows you to choose
between a three-passenger front row bench seat or a
center console. For more information see Center Seat on
page 1-7. In the upward position the armrest acts as a
back support for the front row bench seat. Flip the center
armrest down and it can be used as an armrest for the
driver and passenger seat. Lift the armrest lid to access
the storage area.
If your vehicle is the six-passenger model, there is a
cupholder located underneath the seat. To access, pull
the center seat forward. The cupholder has a support
that adjusts to two positions to fit either a large cup
or two smaller cups.
2-53
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear
of the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as
possible. The net should not be used to store heavy
loads.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes a sliding
glass panel and a sunshade.
The sunroof control is on
the headliner, by the map
lamps.
The sunroof control works only when the ignition is on
or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 2-25.
To raise the sunroof to the vent position, open the
sunshade by hand, then press the back of the control.
Push and hold the front of the control to close the
sunroof from the vent position.
With the sunroof in the vent position, press and release
the back of the control to express-open the sunroof.
The sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof.
To stop the express-open function, press the back
of the control again.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
control. To stop the sunroof, release the control.
The sunshade must be closed manually.
The sunroof panel cannot be opened or closed if your
vehicle has an electrical failure.
2-54
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Cruise Control ..............................................3-10
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System .......................3-14
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-15
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16
Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-16
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16
Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-17
Theater Dimming ..........................................3-17
Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-17
Perimeter Lighting .........................................3-17
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................3-18
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................3-18
Electric Power Management ...........................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-19
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-20
Climate Controls ............................................3-20
Climate Control System .................................3-20
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-24
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-31
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32
Tachometer .................................................3-32
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-32
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-34
Charging System Light ..................................3-36
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-37
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light ...........................................3-38
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ...........................................3-38
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light ...........................................3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-41
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-42
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-45
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-45
Security Light ...............................................3-45
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-46
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-46
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-46
Headlamps Suggested Light ...........................3-47
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-47
Door Ajar Light .............................................3-47
Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-47
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-48
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-48
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-48
Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-49
3-2
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-50
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..........................3-56
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-58
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-76
Audio System(s) .............................................3-84
Setting the Clock ..........................................3-85
Radio(s) ......................................................3-86
Using an MP3 ..............................................3-97
XM Radio Messages ...................................3-100
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-101
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-102
Radio Reception .........................................3-103
Backglass Antenna ......................................3-104
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-105
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-105
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.
B. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps on
page 3-16.
C. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-13. Fog Lamp Control. See Fog Lamps on
page 3-15.
D. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
E. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-31.
G. DIC Buttons (If Equipped) and Hazard Warning
Flasher Button. See DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-50 and Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 3-6.
H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.
I. Audio System Controls. See Audio System(s) on
page 3-84.
J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
K. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
L. Tilt Lever (If Equipped) and Telescoping Column
Lever (If Equipped). See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
M. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-102.
O. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on
page 2-33.
P. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-19.
Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on
page 3-20 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System
on page 3-24.
R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-52.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the
flashers completely off.
Tilt Wheel
If the vehicle has a tilt wheel the steering wheel can be
adjusted to a higher or lower position. Do not adjust
the tilt wheel while driving.
The lever used to tilt the
steering wheel is located
on the left side of the
steering column.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
To tilt the wheel, pull the lever towards you, move the
wheel to a comfortable position, and then release
the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Telescoping Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If the vehicle has a telescoping column on the steering
wheel it adjusts the distance of the steering wheel
to the driver without having to move the driver’s seat.
The lever that makes this
adjustment is located on
the left side of the steering
column and behind the
tilt lever, if the vehicle has
this feature.
To adjust the steering wheel, pull the steering wheel
column lever down and push or pull the steering wheel
to a comfortable position. Then pull the lever up to
lock the wheel in place.
Do not drive the vehicle unless the telescoping column
is locked.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-9.
• LQ Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-9.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-13.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To signal a turn, move the lever up or down. The lever
returns to its original position when the turn is completed.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until the lane
change is completed. The lever will return to its original
position when released.
Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change, or that fail to work, may indicate a
burned-out signal bulb or fuse. Other drivers will not see
the signal. See Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-59 for turn
signal bulb replacement procedures. Also see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-109 for location of fuses.
A chime will sound if the turn signal is left on for more
than 3/4 mile (1.2 km).
3-8
This light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster if
the high beam lamps
are turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps
momentarily to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-62.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist):
Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on
mist longer, for more wipe cycles.
9 (Off):
6 (Delay):
6
(Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to
the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady
wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed):
Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.
Windshield Washer
LQ
(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of
the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear
the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
{CAUTION:
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The
delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be
very useful in light rain or snow.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-9
Cruise Control
The cruise control buttons
are located on outboard
side of the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)
and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit wheel
spin and the cruise control automatically turns off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. When
road conditions allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned back on.
3-10
T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruise control
on and off. The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to
make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
SET–: Press this button to set the speed or make the
vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel):
Press this button to cancel cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If cruise control is set at a desired speed and the
brakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.
However, it does not need to be reset.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed. See Instrument Panel Cluster on
page 3-31.
Once your vehicle reaches a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button
on the steering wheel. The vehicle goes back to
the previously selected speed and stays there.
{CAUTION:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until you reach your new desired speed,
then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
1. Press the cruise control on/off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-11
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until you reach the desired lower speed,
then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the cruise speed you
set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brakes
are applied the cruise control will turn off. Many drivers
find this to be too much trouble and do not use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.
• Press the T button on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased by
turning off the cruise control or the ignition.
3-12
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
The control located to the
left of the cluster on the
instrument panel, operates
the exterior lamps.
P (On/Off): Briefly turn the control to this position to
turn off the automatic light control. Briefly turn to this
position again to turn automatic light control on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
•
•
•
•
It controls the following systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
< (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
3-13
2
(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps together with the following lamps
listed below.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door is
opened when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/OFF
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the headlamps or parking
lamps are on.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL
can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but
they can be especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset. DRL lamps are required to
function at all times on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
•
•
•
•
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
- (Foglamps) (If Equipped): Push the fog lamps
button to turn them on and off. See Fog Lamps on
page 3-15 for additional information.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
• The parking brake is released.
While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The turn
signal, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not be
on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
3-14
When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off
and the vehicle’s headlamps and parking lamps will turn
on. The other lamps that come on with the headlamps
will also come on.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will go
off and the DRL will come on.
To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior
lamp control off and then do one of the following:
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog
lamps, the button is
located in the center of the
exterior lamps control
on the left side of
the steering column.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlamp
position.
• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off and
back to AUTO.
This feature is not available for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it is
dark outside, move the exterior lamp control to the
parking lamp position. The parking lamps remain on and
the headlamps turn off. The fog lamps also go on if
they were on previously.
As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Press the fog lamps button to turn the lamps on or off.
While the high-beam headlamps are on, the fog
lamps are off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on
after the ignition has been turned to off, the exterior
lamps will turn off after about 10 minutes. This protects
the battery from being drained.
Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on,
if they are still needed.
3-15
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Your interior lamps
control is located next to
the exterior lamps
control and to the left of
the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
The instrument panel lights can be brightened or
dimmed by pressing the center knob of the interior lamp
controls until it pops out. Turn the knob clockwise to
brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them.
Courtesy Lamps
Courtesy lamps come on to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle. These lamps will come on when the
interior lamp control is in the door position and any door
is opened.
9
Entry Lighting
1
The courtesy lamps come on and stay on for a set time
whenever the interior lamp control is in the door
position and the UNLOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.
+ (On): Turn the control to this position to turn on
the interior lamps.
The lamps stay on while a door is opened and then turn
off automatically about 25 seconds after it is closed. If
the UNLOCK button is pressed and a door is not
opened, the lamps will turn off after about 25 seconds.
The interior lamps can be controlled, or automatically
turned on or off under certain conditions. They are
explained in the following text.
The courtesy lamps turn off when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN or START. They will come on again
when a door is opened.
(Off): Turn the control to this position to disable
courtesy lamps, entry lighting, delayed entry lighting, and
delayed exit lighting.
(Door): Turn the control to this position to turn the
interior lamps on when any door is open and when
the ignition key is removed from the ignition.
3-16
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
After all the doors have been closed, the delayed entry
lighting feature will continue to work until one of the
following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The doors are locked.
• 25 seconds has passed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five second fade out of
the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature can be programmed either on or off using
the Driver Information Center. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76 under INT (Interior)
LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED. When activated, the interior
will be lit for a short period of time after the ignition
key is removed from the ignition.
The ignition must be off and the interior lamp control
must be in the door position for delayed exit lighting to
work. When the ignition key is removed, interior
illumination will activate and remain on until one of the
following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON/RUN.
• The power door locks are activated.
• 25 seconds has passed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened, the
timed illumination period will be canceled and the interior
lamps will remain on.
Perimeter Lighting
Perimeter lighting provides a period of exterior vehicle
lighting. Perimeter lighting activates when the key
is removed from the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked
using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The amount of time the exterior lamps will remain on
can be programmed using the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See “EXIT LIGHT DELAY” under DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additional
information.
3-17
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps located on
the overhead console. Press the lens to turn them on
and off.
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps located near
the rear assist handles. Press the lens to turn them on
and off.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When the
state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage
or voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),
you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
3-18
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels
of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, the Driver Information Center (DIC)
message might display Battery Saver Active. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This helps prevent the vehicle’s battery from draining
in case the interior courtesy lamps, reading lamps, trunk
lamp, underhood lamp, glove box lamps, or sun visor
vanity lamps, if equipped, are accidently left on.
If any of these lamps are left on while the ignition is off,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The
lamps will not come back on again until one of the
following occurs:
• The ignition is turned on.
• The interior lamps control is turned off, then to door
or on.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets enable power electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or a CB radio to
be used inside the vehicle.
Your vehicle has 12-volt outlets. One outlet is located
on the center console below the climate controls. There
may be another outlet located inside the center
storage console or in the flip and fold console.
Open the cover to use the outlet. Be sure to close the
cover when the outlet is not in use.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
3-19
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray and
cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter may be located
under the climate control system. The removable ashtray
can be placed into the front console cupholder.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When the heating element is ready, it will
pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes.
3-20
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it is
activated, the climate control system will automatically
cool the vehicle if the temperature is greater than
90°F (32°C) and heat the vehicle if the temperature is
below 37°F (3°C). If the temperature is between
37°F (3°C) and 90°F (32°C), the last control setting
selected when the engine was running will be used.
Normal operation and the last setting of the climate
control system will return after the key is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
Use the right knob to select from the following modes:
H
(Vent): This mode directs outside air to the
instrument panel outlets. If driving in city traffic, and the
vehicle is stopped and idling, or the weather is hot,
turning on the recirculation mode helps to prevent the
air inside the vehicle from becoming stale. After five
minutes recirculate will allow some outside air into the
vehicle.
)
Operation
OFF: Turn the left knob to this position to turn the
climate control system off.
9
(Fan): Turn the knob by this symbol, located on
the left side of the climate control panel, clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
fan speed. The fan speed will be temporarily reduced
between the transition to a new mode. The fan will
resume the original speed when the transition to the new
mode is complete.
(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air to
the floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward the
windshield. Slightly cooler air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and warmer air is directed to
the floor outlets.
6
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed toward the side
window outlets and a little air directed to the windshield.
In this mode, the system will automatically use outside
air. The air conditioning compressor will be engaged
unless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-21
You can also select modes by using the following
buttons:
h
(Recirculate): Press this button to recirculate
cabin air through the vehicle. It can be used to
help reduce the outside air and odors that enter your
vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
quicker. An indicator light below the button will come
on in this mode. Operation in this mode during periods of
high humidity and cool outside temperatures may
result in increased window fogging. If window fogging is
experienced, select the defrost mode. To prevent the
air inside the vehicle from becoming stale, after
five minutes recirculate will allow some outside air into
the vehicle.
#
(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. When this button
is pressed, an indicator light below the button will come
on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
Air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as
the fan switch is on. The indicator light will change
with each button press even when conditions prevent
operation.
On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up, open
the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close
them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
3-22
For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent air mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select the air conditioner.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this, after five minutes recirculate will
allow some outside air into the vehicle.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of high humidity
causing moisture to condense on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear frost or fog
from the windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of condensation and to warm the vehicle’s
occupants. Use the defrost mode to remove frost or
condensation from the windshield quickly.
See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section for
information on clearing the rear window of fog or ice.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
-
(Defog): This mode directs half of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets and half to
the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system
turns recirculation off and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. Pressing the recirculation button
will have no effect other than turning on the indicator
light while in defog mode.
0
(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets. When you select this
mode, the system turns recirculation off and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is near or below freezing. Pressing the recirculation
button will have no effect other than turning on
the indicator light while in defrost mode.
<
(Rear): Press the button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light below the button will
come on to let you know that the rear window defogger
is activated.
The rear window defogger will only work when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger will stay on for
about 20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about 20 minutes
before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by
pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.
Automatic Operation
2. Press the PASS button or the up or down arrows on
the passenger side to turn the passenger
temperature set on and off. When turned on, the
passenger temperature will be the same as the driver
setting. Press the up or down arrow on passenger
side to adjust the passenger temperature setting.
When the passenger’s temperature set is off, the
passenger display will be off and the driver’s
set temperature will be for the driver and passenger.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system will start
out blowing air at the floor but may change
modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to
maintain the chosen temperature setting. The length
of time needed for warm up will depend on the
outside temperature and the length of time that has
elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button for
automatic control of the inside temperature, the air
delivery mode, and the fan speed. There might be a
delay of two to three minutes before the fan comes on
when the automatic operation is used in cold weather.
For the automatic system to function, the temperature
must be set between 61°F (15°C) and 89°F (32°C).
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center
of the instrument panel, near the windshield. For
more information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors”
later in this section.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for the vehicle.
3-24
4. Press OFF to turn the climate control system off.
Only the rear defog and heated seats will function.
Press AUTO or any other button except the
heated seats or rear defog to turn the climate
control system back on.
This control has four types of operation.
• Automatic can set/change the temperature only.
AUTO and temperature only will appear on the
display.
• Semi-Automatic Fan can set/change the
temperature and mode. The fan operates
automatically. The temperature and mode will
appear on the display.
• Semi-Automatic Mode can set/change the
temperature and fan speed. The mode operates
automatically. The fan speed and temperature will
appear on the display.
• Manual can set/change the temperature, mode and
fan. The fan speed, temperature, and mode will
appear on the display.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the climate
control system will automatically regulate the inside
temperature of your vehicle when the remote start
system is activated. Normal operation and the last
setting of the climate control system will return after the
key is turned on.
Manual Operation
During daylight hours, the instrument panel brightness
control might need to be adjusted to the highest setting,
in order to see the indicator lights for the various
climate control settings.
OFF: Press this button to turn the climate control
system off.
y z (Temperature): Press these buttons to manually
adjust the temperature inside the vehicle. Press the
up arrow on the driver or passenger side to raise
the temperature, and press the down arrow to lower the
temperature. The display will show the selected
temperature.
z9
(Fan): Press this button to decrease the fan
speed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automatic
operation and places the system in manual or
semi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button to return
to automatic operation. If the airflow seems low when
the fan is at the highest setting, the passenger
compartment air filter may need to be replaced. For
more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-29 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
3-25
9y
(Fan): Press this button to increase the fan
speed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automatic
operation and places the system in manual or
semi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button to return
to automatic operation. If the airflow seems low when
the fan is at the highest setting, the passenger
compartment air filter may need to be replaced. For
more information see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 3-29 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
6
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and a small amount to the windshield.
h
(Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. This mode keeps outside
air from coming into the vehicle. It can be used to
help reduce the outside air and odors that enter your
vehicle or help cool the air inside the vehicle quicker.
Recirculation is not available while in the floor, defrost,
or floor/defog modes. Using recirculation for long
periods of time may cause the air inside your vehicle to
become too dry. Recirculation mode has a five minute
timer after which the system allows for some fresh
outside air into the vehicle to maintain interior air quality.
#
(Bi-Level): This setting directs airflow to the
instrument panel and floor outlets. A small amount of air
is also directed to the windshield and the side window
outlets.
(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on and off. The indicator
light on the button will come on when the air conditioning
is on. The indicator light will change with each button
press even when conditions prevent operation.
Y
(
)
(Vent): This mode directs air through the instrument
panel outlets.
3-26
(Heated Seats): Press this button to turn the driver
or passenger heated seats on and off. See Heated
Seats on page 1-3 for additional information.
Defogging and Defrosting
1
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.
-
(Floor/Defog): Press this button to direct the air
between the windshield, floor outlets and side windows.
When you select this mode, the system turns
recirculation off and runs the air conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is near or below
freezing. Pressing the recirculation button will have no
effect other than turning on the indicator light while
in floor/defog mode.
(Defrost): Press this button to direct most of the
air to the windshield, with some air directed to the
side windows. In this mode, the system will automatically
turn off the recirculation and run the air conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing. Pressing the recirculation button will
have no effect other than turning on the indicator light
while in defrost mode.
Sensors
The solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar heat
and the air inside of the vehicle. This information is
used to maintain the selected temperature by initiating
needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan
speed, and the air delivery system. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the
center of the instrument panel, near the windshield,
or the system will not work properly.
3-27
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. The rear
window defogger will only work when the engine
is running.
Use the thumbwheels located between the center
outlets to open and close the outlets. Move the lever in
the center of each air outlet to adjust the direction of
the airflow.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on and off. Be sure
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
Operation Tips
The rear window defogger will turn off about 20 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will only run for about 20 minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-28
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• This vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting it may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air
Filter on page 3-29.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from
the fender rail and air inlet grille.
The passenger compartment air filter is located in
the engine compartment below the air inlet grille, near
the passenger’s side windshield wiper arm. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.
5. Peel back the hood weather-strip from the
passenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to the center
of the hood.
The filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering
the air conditioning module. The filter needs to be
changed periodically to keep the air conditioning working
at its best. For information on how often to change
the passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and turn the
windshield wipers on.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF when the windshield
wipers are in the upright position.
6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.
7. Remove the air inlet grille.
8. Remove the water deflector panel.
3. Raise the hood.
3-29
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on the vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
9. Remove the old air filter.
10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. See
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13 for
the type of filter to use. Make sure it slides
under the compartment retainers.
11. Reverse Steps 1 through 8.
For best climate control performance, re-installation of a
clean air filter is required.
3-30
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know the warning lights and
gages. They are a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show
how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safely
and economically.
Base level shown, Uplevel similar
3-31
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the driver
information center. You can set a Trip A and Trip B
odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-50.
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the odometer/trip switch
on the instrument panel cluster.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
3-32
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-62 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for several
seconds and then flash for several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-54.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The
light should go out and the
system is ready.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-33
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for
more information.
3-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
When you start the
vehicle, the passenger
airbag status indicator will
light ON and OFF for
several seconds as
a system check.
If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF to let you know the
status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF is lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-62 for more on this,
including important safety information.
3-35
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-33 for more on this, including
important safety information.
3-36
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition key, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58
for more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and the parking brake is
not applied, there is a brake problem. Have your
brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, a chime will
sound and you should pull off the road and stop
carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to
push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It
may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-27.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-37
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for all
brake related DIC messages.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle has a Traction
Control System (TCS)
warning light.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there
is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light
still stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light is not on, your vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, your vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-37.
3-38
If this warning light comes on and stays on, there may
be a problem with the TCS and, if your vehicle has
this feature, the StabiliTrak® system.
The TCS warning light will come on briefly when the
engine is started. If it does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is
a problem. This light will also come on when the traction
control button is pressed disabling the system.
If the TCS warning light stays on or comes on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and
stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning
the ignition off then back on. If the light still stays on or
comes back on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. Have the traction control system
and, if your vehicle has this feature, the StabiliTrak®
system inspected as soon as possible. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-8 for more information.
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this light
may come on for the
following reasons:
• If the traction control button located on the center
console is pressed, turning the system off. This
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again and the warning
light should turn off. See Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-7.
• If the system is affected by an engine-related
problem, the system will turn off and the warning
light will come on.
If the light comes on and stays on for an extended
period of time when the system is turned on, the vehicle
needs service.
3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-30 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
3-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The vehicle has a gage
that shows the engine
coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves towards the H, the engine is
too hot.
This reading indicates the same thing as the warning
light. It means that the engine coolant has overheated.
If the vehicle has been operating under normal
driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle,
and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-30.
Low Coolant Warning Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it comes on briefly
when you turn your ignition
on as a bulb check only.
Tire Pressure Light
Your vehicle has a tire
pressure light.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for more
information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Tires on page 5-63 for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then
is Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 5-71 for more information.
This light comes on briefly when the engine is started
and provides information about tire pressures and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
3-41
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II
problem and service is
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-42
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoid hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
Reduce vehicle speed.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
3-43
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-44
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
Change Engine Oil Light
If this light comes on, it
means that service is
required for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine as a check to be
sure it works. If it does not,
have your vehicle
serviced.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine
Oil on page 5-18 for more information.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
light. See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more information.
If this light is blinking, a chime will sound indicating
low engine oil.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-20.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not
flowing through your engine properly. You could be low
on oil and you might have some other system problem.
3-45
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
If the reduced engine power light is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while the reduced engine power light is
on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on, the
vehicle should be taken to an authorized GM dealer as
soon as possible for service.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
Reduced Engine Power Light
If the reduced engine
power light is on, a chime
will sound and a
noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance
may occur.
3-46
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8
for more information.
Headlamps Suggested Light
Door Ajar Light
This light will come on
when the use of
headlamps is suggested.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when the ignition is
on. If the light stays on,
a chime will sound
indicating your windshield
washer fluid is low.
When the ignition is on,
this light will stay on until
all doors are closed
and completely latched.
You will hear a chime if a door is unlatched after the
engine is started and the vehicle is not in PARK (P).
Trunk Ajar Light
This light will come on and
a chime will sound if the
trunk is ajar and the
vehicle is not in PARK (P).
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-44 for more
information.
Try closing the trunk again. Never drive with the
trunk open.
3-47
Service Vehicle Soon Light
For vehicles with this light,
it will come on if a
condition exists that may
require the vehicle to
be taken in for service.
If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the
gage reads full.
• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but
it took more, or less, than half of the tank’s capacity
to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or accelerating.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
is turned off.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage indicates
about how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank when the
ignition is on.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Your vehicle may have a low fuel light. It is a circle
located on the fuel gage and will come on and a chime
will sound periodically when the vehicle is low on fuel.
The light will go off when fuel is added to the fuel tank.
It will also come on for a few seconds when the ignition
is turned on as a check to indicate it is working. If it
does not come on then, have it fixed.
When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuel
left, but you should get more fuel soon.
3-48
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), a
LOW FUEL message will appear. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-58 for more information.
Check Gas Cap Light
If your vehicle has this
light, it will come on if your
gas cap is not securely
fastened.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42 for more
information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in
the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
The DIC buttons are located on the center of the
instrument panel, below the center outlets.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the uplevel DIC will display the WELCOME
DRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is used,
and then the information that was last displayed before
the engine was turned off.
The base level DIC displays the odometer and trip
odometers only.
The uplevel DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,
fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system, and
compass display information. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is detected. In addition,
the uplevel DIC displays phone numbers that are
called using the OnStar® system, if equipped. See
OnStar® System on page 2-43.
The outside air temperature automatically appears in
the bottom right corner of the uplevel DIC display when
viewing the trip/odometer screens, fuel screens and
some of the gages screens. If the outside air
temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C), the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word ICE for two minutes. If there
is a problem with the system that controls the
temperature display, the letters OC (open circuit) or SC
(short circuit) will appear on the display. If this occurs,
have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
The uplevel DIC also allows some features to be
customized or personalized. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76 for more information.
3-49
DIC Operation and Displays
DIC Buttons
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the
instrument panel. Depending on whether your vehicle
has the base level or uplevel DIC, the buttons and
modes available will differ.
The base level buttons are the trip/odometer and
English/Metric buttons.
Uplevel shown
The uplevel buttons are the trip/odometer, fuel, gages,
set/reset, and option buttons.
The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
TRIP/ODO (Trip/Odometer): For vehicles with the
base level DIC, press this button to display the odometer
and trip distance.
For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, press this button to
display the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,
and average speed.
E/M (English/Metric)**: For vehicles with the base
level DIC, press this button to select between English or
Metric units.
For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, to select between
English or Metric units, see “Units” later in this section.
. (Fuel)*:
Press this button to display the fuel
range and average fuel economy.
3-50
2 (Gages)*: Press this button to display the battery
voltage, oil life, and tire pressure readings.
r (Set/Reset)*:
Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
4 (Option)*:
Press this button to display the units,
language, personalization, compass zone, and compass
calibration. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on
page 3-76 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) on
page 3-56 for more information.
t (Traction Control): Press this button to turn
traction control on or off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.
Press and hold this button to turn StabiliTrak® off, for
vehicles with this feature. Press this button again to turn
both traction control and StabiliTrak® on. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8 for more information.
| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazard
warning flashers on and off. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6 for more information.
Trip/Odometer Menu Items
TRIP/ODO (Trip Odometer): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Odometer
Press the trip/odometer button until the odometer
displays. This mode shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the trip/odometer button until A or B displays.
This mode shows the current distance traveled in either
miles or kilometers since the last reset for each trip
odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
The display will show the odometer on the top line and
the trip odometer information, either A or B, on the
bottom line.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
briefly pressing the set/reset button on vehicles with the
uplevel DIC or by briefly pressing and holding the trip
odometer button on vehicles with the base level
DIC while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
*These buttons are only available on vehicles with the
uplevel DIC.
**This button is only available on vehicles with the base
level DIC.
3-51
There is also a retroactive trip odometer function that
performs the following for each trip odometer:
• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph (5 km/h)
during the current ignition cycle, this function will
set the trip odometer to the distance driven
during the current ignition cycle.
• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded
3 mph (5 km/h), this function will set the trip
odometer to the distance driven during the previous
ignition cycle plus the distance driven during the
current ignition cycle.
Press and hold the set/reset button on vehicles with the
uplevel DIC or the trip/odometer button on vehicles
with the base level DIC for three seconds, then release
the button. The retroactive trip odometer value will
be set into the currently displayed trip odometer.
Time Elapsed (Uplevel Only)
Press the trip/odometer button until TIME ELAPSED :00
displays. This mode is like a stopwatch, in that you
can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another. Each of the fields for the hours, minutes,
and seconds are two numeric digits.
3-52
Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the
set/reset button on vehicles with the uplevel DIC to start
the timing feature. Press the set/reset button again to
stop it. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle,
during a trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature
will automatically start timing where it left off when
you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold the
set/reset button for about 1.5 seconds. The display will
return to zero. Press the trip/odometer button to exit
from the TIME ELAPSED display.
Average Speed (Uplevel Only)
Press the trip/odometer button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This mode shows the average speed of
the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on
the various vehicle speed recorded since the last reset
of this value. To reset the value, press the trip/odometer
button to display AVERAGE SPEED, then press and
hold the set/reset button on vehicles with the uplevel
DIC. The display will return to zero.
Fuel Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
. (Fuel):
Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Fuel Range
Press the fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. This
mode shows the approximate number of remaining
miles or kilometers the vehicle can be driven without
refueling.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This mode shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This
number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu item
was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Gages Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
Fuel range is based on several factors, including
distance traveled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change. For
example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this mode may read one number, but if the vehicle
is driven on a freeway, the number may change even
though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This
is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
2 (Gages): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW will
display followed by the LOW FUEL message. See “LOW
FUEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58 for more information.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a
DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58 for more information.
Battery
Press the gages button until BATTERY displays. This
mode shows the current battery voltage.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This
is normal.
See Electric Power Management on page 3-18 for more
information.
3-53
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Press the gages button until OIL LIFE displays. This
mode shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful
life. If you see OIL LIFE 99% on the display, that means
99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life
system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
Press the gages button until FRONT TIRE PRESSURE
displays. This mode shows the pressure for the front
tires. To view the pressure for the rear tires, press the
gages button again until REAR TIRE PRESSURE
displays. The tire pressure will be shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE OIL
SOON message will appear on the display. You should
change your oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil
on page 5-18. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the
pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for more
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed. It
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-21. The display will show 100%
when the system is reset.
3-54
If the tire pressure display shows dashes or blanks
instead of a value, there may be a problem with your
vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
Option Menu Items (Uplevel Only)
Personalization
4 (Option):
Press the option button until PERSONAL PROGRAM
displays. Your vehicle may have personalization
capabilities that allow you to program certain features to
a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Units
Press the option button until UNITS displays. This mode
allows you to select between English or Metric units
of measurement. Once in this mode, press the set/reset
button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units.
Language
Press the option button until the language screen
displays. This mode allows you to select the language
in which the DIC messages will appear. Once in
this mode, press the set/reset button to select among
the following choices:
• English
• Francais (French)
• Espanol (Spanish)
Your vehicle may also have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be
programmed to a preferred setting for up to two
drivers. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76
for additional information on personal programming.
Compass Zone
To change the compass zone through the DIC, see DIC
Compass (Uplevel Only) on page 3-56.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. To calibrate
the compass through the DIC, see DIC Compass
(Uplevel Only) on page 3-56.
3-55
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the option button until COMPASS ZONE
displays.
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3-56
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip or fuel button until the vehicle
heading, for example, N for North, is displayed
in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad
holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the
vehicle and calibrate the compass.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
2. Press the option button until COMPASS
CALIBRATION displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATION BEGUN DRIVE
IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION FINISHED
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to COMPASS
CALIBRATION.
3-57
DIC Warnings and Messages
A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
Messages are displayed on the uplevel DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one
after another.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-40.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the uplevel DIC buttons to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the DIC display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared.
If there are any active warning messages when the
vehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the
DIC goes into a reminder mode. The reminder mode
displays any active message. If there are multiple
messages, the DIC displays each message for five
seconds. After each active message is displayed once,
the reminder mode turns off.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-58
This message comes on while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
warning message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on. If this message continues
to appear, have the system repaired by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to
the engine.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
If your vehicle has an uplevel DIC, you can monitor
the battery voltage by pressing the gages button until
BATTERY displays.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when service is required for the
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on
page 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information.
The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen
under the gages menu on the DIC must also be reset.
See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-50 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with
this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays and a chime sounds while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
3-59
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
CHECK GAS CAP
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message may display if the fuel cap is not on, or is
not fully tightened. The check gas cap light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Check Gas Cap
Light on page 3-49. Check the fuel cap to ensure that it is
on properly. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn this message off. See Filling the
Tank on page 5-8 for more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 5-63, Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21,
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70. The DIC also
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-50. If the tire pressure is low,
the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See
Tire Pressure Light on page 3-41.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
3-60
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
DELAYED LOCKING
This message displays to inform the driver that even
though a door lock switch or the lock button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter has been
pressed, that actual locking of the doors is being
delayed because the delayed locking feature has been
activated in the DIC. See “DELAYED LOCKING”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for
more information.
DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver door is not closed
properly. Make sure that the door is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message appears and a chime sounds when the
ignition is off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
3-61
DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver side rear door is
not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-30 for more information.
3-62
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature
warning light also appears on the instrument panel
cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
on page 3-40 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
on page 3-40 for more information.
To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the air
conditioner if it is on. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air conditioner can be turned
back on.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message displays when the amount of available
light outside of the vehicle is low, or the windshield
wipers have been on for about 30 seconds, and
the exterior lamps control is off or in the parking lamps
position. This message informs the driver that turning
on the exterior lamps is recommended. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 for more information.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HOOD AJAR
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed properly.
Make sure that the hood is closed completely. See
Hood Release on page 5-11.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HOT TRANS (Transmission) FLUID
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow
it to idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
3-63
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 2-5.
This message displays when the left front turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
KEY IN IGNITION
This message displays and a chime sounds continuously
when the driver’s door is open and the key is in
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message disappears and the chiming stops when
the key is removed from the ignition.
3-64
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the left rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 5-59.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW BRAKE FLUID
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the brake fluid level is low.
Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible. See Brakes on page 5-46 for
proper fluid level.
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gage on page 3-48 and Filling the Tank on page 5-8 for
more information.
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears on
the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.
The message displays and a chime sounds while the
ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-65
LOW OIL PRESSURE
LOW WASHER FLUID
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe engine damage can result from driving a
vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil
on page 5-18 for more information.
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soon
as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the windshield washer
reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-44 for more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light
on page 3-45.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
ON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen. This message re-displays for a
few seconds if the condition still exists when the engine
is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-66
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PARKING BRAKE ON
PARK LAMPS ON
This message displays to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in ON/RUN,
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Release the parking brake before driving. See Parking
Brake on page 2-32 for more information.
This message displays to alert the driver when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on while the ignition is
off and the driver’s door is opened. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-13 for more information. A chime
sounds continuously while this message is displayed.
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears on
the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-37.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
A chime sounds continuously while this message is
displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press any of
the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and
to clear it from the screen.
This message displays when the front passenger door
is not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closed
completely.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-67
PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed properly. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
3-68
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE
This message displays when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency. In this mode, you will notice a significant
loss in power and engine performance. See Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-32 for
more information. Anytime this message is on, the
vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
REMOTE START DISABLED
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays if a remote start attempt is
unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the following
conditions are true when a remote start attempt is
made:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
•
•
•
•
•
The key is in the ignition.
The hood or the doors are not closed.
There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
• The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles has been
reached.
• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-76 and Remote Vehicle Start
on page 2-8 for more information.
RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the right front turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-69
RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the right rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 5-59.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays when a problem with the brake
system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
The brake system warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears on
the DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.
This message displays when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
The antilock brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Antilock Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-38.
3-70
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE PARK LAMPS
This message displays when there is a problem with the
park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp fuse is
blown and replace the fuse if necessary. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-109 and Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-110 for more information. If
changing the fuse does not correct the problem, see
your dealer/retailer.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays if
there has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak®.
A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light on page 3-38. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-8 for more information.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-71
SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that
the system is disabled and it is not protecting the
vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before
turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III Operation on
page 2-22 for more information.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-41. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-73 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays and a chime sounds only while
the ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-72
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
This message displays when the traction system is not
functioning properly. A warning light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-38. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7 for more
information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORT
STEERING
If your vehicle has variable effort steering, this message
displays when if this system is not functioning properly.
See Steering on page 4-9 for more information.
Have the system serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
3-73
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® is not active.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen.
STABILITY CONTROL OFF
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
any time the system turns off. When this message
has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer available
to assist you with directional control of the vehicle.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-8.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® system to turn off:
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays
when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-8.
• The system is turned off by pressing and holding
the traction control button for five seconds. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
3-74
STARTING DISABLED
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system or
vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays when the traction system turns
off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6
or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7
for more information.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after two seconds.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
This message displays when the traction system is on.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 or Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the system is no longer active.
Any of the following conditions may cause the system to
turn off:
• The system is turned off by pressing the traction
control button located on the center of the instrument
panel. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-7.
• The battery is low.
• There is a system failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared from
the screen.
3-75
TRUNK AJAR
DIC Vehicle Personalization
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Trunk on page 2-14.
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers. The
customization features include the following:
This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds if it
has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in ON/RUN. This message clears from
the DIC if the turn signal is manually turned off, a turn is
completed, or the message is acknowledged.
3-76
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exterior lighting delay
Interior lighting delay
Delayed locking
Content theft
Remote keyless entry feedback
Remote start
Your vehicle may also have personalization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. The first
personalized key corresponds to driver 1 and the second
personalized key corresponds to driver 2. The
personalization features include the following:
• Radio station presets
• Auto door unlock preferences
• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences
All of the customization and personalization options may
not be available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization and
personalization features were set when your vehicle left
the factory, but may have been changed from their
default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
The driver’s personalization preferences are recalled by
using the key programmed for driver 1 or 2.
To change customization and personalization
preferences, use the following procedure:
Entering the Personal Program Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the option button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONAL
PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.
If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal
program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM NOT
AVAILABLE will display.
3. Press the set/reset button to begin.
4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen.
Press the option button to display the features
that are available to program.
Press the set/reset button to change the setting of
each feature.
Customization Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
FACTORY DEFAULTS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
and personalization features back to their factory default
settings.
Press the option button until FACTORY DEFAULTS
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
NO (default): The customization and personalization
features will not be set to their factory default settings.
YES: The customization and personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-77
ALL KEYS WILL BE RESET
This screen will only display if YES was selected on the
FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following
settings:
60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
60 seconds.
90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
90 seconds.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to their
factory default settings and the DIC will return to the
PERSONAL PROGRAM menu.
INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED
OK: The features will be set to their factory default
settings, the DIC will exit the personal program menu,
and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will display.
This feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY
Press the option button until INT LIGHTS KEYS
REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following settings:
This feature allows you to set the amount of time the
exterior lamps remain on after the key is removed from
the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not
cause the interior lamps to turn on.
Press the option button until EXT LIGHT DELAY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
15 seconds.
30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
3-78
DELAYED LOCKING
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all of the doors have been closed for about
five seconds.
When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it may be
activated when the key is out of the ignition by doing
one of the following:
• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch one
time while the driver’s door is open.
• Pressing the passenger’s door power lock switch
one time while the passenger’s door is open.
• Pressing the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter one time while any door
is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is
active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating one
of the above actions more than one time.
If a door remains open, without any other door being
opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after about
45 seconds.
If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock the
doors. See Delayed Locking on page 2-12 for more
information.
Press the option button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be
delayed by five seconds while a door is open after a
power door lock switch is pressed, or the lock button on
the RKE transmitter is pressed while a door is open.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-79
CONTENT THEFT
FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
once this feature is turned on, the system will activate
if someone tries to enter the vehicle without using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
correct key.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the option button until CONTENT THEFT appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned off.
ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned on.
When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will be armed when the vehicle is locked by pressing
the lock button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the
power door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-20 and Power Door Locks on page 2-11 for
more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-80
Press the option button until FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the
vehicle.
LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE START
Personalization Menu Items
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows the
remote start to be turned off or on. The remote start
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for
more information.
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program setting for up to two drivers:
Press the option button until REMOTE START appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
PERSONALIZE KEY
This feature allows you to personalize a key to be
recognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you
to program personalization features to a preferred
setting to correspond to key 1 or 2. If you are using a
key that has already been personalized, this screen will
not display.
Press the option button until PERSONALIZE KEY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
NO (default): The key will not be personalized.
YES: The key will be personalized.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
3-81
REPLACE KEY
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This screen displays only if YES was selected for
the PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2 have
already been personalized, and the current key being
used is not key 1 or 2. This feature allows you to program
a key to be recognized as key 1 or 2 in the event that the
previously programmed key needs to be replaced.
This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be
turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for all of
the doors.
1: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 1.
OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of the
ignition.
2: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 2.
CANCEL (default): The key will not be programmed.
RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED
This screen displays only if YES was selected for the
PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature allows you to
set the radio station presets to be recognized for the
key, 1 or 2, that is being used. You may notice a change
to the radio after this message displays. After this
message displays, any change to the presets will be
recognized for key 1 or 2 and will be maintained by
the radio.
3-82
Press the option button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following settings:
DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of
the ignition.
ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out
of the ignition.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO UNLOCK ON
This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was
selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature. This
feature allows the selection of when the vehicle’s doors
will unlock.
Press the option button until AUTO UNLOCK ON
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following settings:
KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
taken out of the ignition.
PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Press the option button until FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST
PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following settings:
DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock on the
first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press of the
unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the option button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC. The DIC
will then display PRESS UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY
FOB. Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
and the setting will be saved for that RKE transmitter.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the option button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
After programming the last option, the message
PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED appears on the DIC
display for a few seconds, then the display returns to the
PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.
FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS
Exiting the Personal Program Menu
This feature allows the selection of which doors will
unlock on the first press of the unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 2-5 for more information.
The personal program menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The end of the personal program menu is reached.
3-83
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-84
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25 for
more information.
Setting the Clock
Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM
displays. Press and hold M until the correct minute
displays. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not
work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
3-85
Radio(s)
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with CD similar
3-86
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Playing the Radio
P (Power):
Press to turn the system on and off.
v (Volume): Turn to increase or to decrease the
volume.
DISP (Display): Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and time of day. While
the ignition is off, press this button to display the time.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Depending on the
radio, the selection may be SPEED VOL MIN (volume
minimum), SPEED VOL MED (volume medium), or
SPEED VOL MAX (volume maximum). Each higher
setting allows for more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. Then while driving, SCV increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. NONE displays if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn SCV off, press this
button until OFF or SPEED VOL OFF displays.
If your vehicle’s radio has XM™ (if equipped), press
the DISP button while in XM™ mode to retrieve
four different categories of information related to the
current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or
PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until the desired display appears, then hold
this button for two seconds. The radio beeps once and
the selected display becomes the default.
e (Tune):
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume): If your vehicle’s
radio has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV), the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road
and wind noise while driving.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1™ or XM2™ (if equipped).
Turn to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press and release the arrows to go to
the previous or the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN or SCN displays and the
radio beeps once. The radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, and then goes to the next station.
Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to
stop scanning presets.
3-87
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCAN or PSC displays
and the radio beeps twice. The radio goes to a preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of
the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM, six XM1™
and six XM2™ (if equipped)) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons.
To program either radio:
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
1. Turn the radio on.
SCAN: Press until SC displays. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, and then goes to
the next station. Press again to stop scanning stations.
3. Tune to the desired station.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Only): Your vehicle’s radio may have an INFO button.
If the current station on the radio has a message,
the information symbol displays. Press to see the
message. If the entire message is not displayed, parts
of the message appears every three seconds. To
manually scroll through the message, press and release
the INFO button.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO displays.
3-88
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1™ or
XM2™ (if equipped).
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until the radio beeps once. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed again, the
station and equalization that were stored, returns.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e (Bass/Treble):
Press and release until BASS or
TREBLE displays. Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the bass or treble.
Press and hold to adjust the bass and treble to the
middle position. The radio beeps once.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
displays. ALL CENTERED displays and the radio
beeps once.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select customized
equalization settings.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press and release until BASS or TREBLE displays.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the CAT button to enter the category select
mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the
e knob to select a category.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to go to the category’s first station.
e (Balance/Fade):
To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release until
BAL (balance) displays. Turn this knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again to go to another
station within that category. The category will
display. If CAT times out and is no longer on the
display, go back to Step 1.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release until FAD (fade) displays.
Turn this knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
5. Press CAT to exit the category select mode or wait
for CAT to time out.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position,
press, then press and hold until the radio beeps once.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
displays. ALL CENTERED displays and the radio
beeps once.
3-89
Scanning Categories (CAT) (XM™
Satellite Radio Service Only)
LOCKED: If LOCKED displays, it means the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
To scan a desired category by doing the following:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
1. Press the CAT button to enter the category select
mode. The current category displays.
2. Turn the
e knob to select a category.
3. Press either SEEK arrow for two seconds once the
desired category is displayed, to scan the stations
in that category.
4. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOT
FOUND displays and the radio returns to the last station
you were listening to.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE displays,
it means that the radio has not been configured properly
for your vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
3-90
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service fee
is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-100 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD begins playing. To insert a
CD while the ignition is off, first press the Z button
or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD quality, the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the CD
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
3-91
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD
player, see the following:
LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD
player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the indicator light,
located to the right of the slot, begins to flash and
MULTI LOAD # displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the
CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player
pulls the CD in.
3-92
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light begins
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green, another CD can be loaded. The CD player takes
up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play a
specific CD, press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar appears under the
CD number that is playing and the track number displays.
Z (Eject):
Press to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold this button for two seconds.
The radio beeps once and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, begins to flash and EJECT
ALL displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #
displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light begins
flashing again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
Z button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD is
automatically pulled back into the player. If a CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player senses an error and
tries to eject the CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the Z button to eject a CD
after trying to push it in manually. The player’s
25-second eject timer resets at each press of the eject
button, causing the player to not eject the CD until
the 25-second time period has elapsed.
1 s (Reverse): Press to reverse within the
current track.
2 \ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward within the
current track.
3 N (Repeat): Depending on the radio, press to hear
a track over again. REPEAT TRACK displays. The
current track continues to repeat.
For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to repeat
one track or an entire CD.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat playing a track, press and release this
button. RPT # displays. Press this button again
to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat playing a CD, press and hold this button
for two seconds. REPEAT CD # displays. Press
this button again to turn off repeat play.
3-93
4 RDM (Random): Depending on the radio, press
to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM ON displays. Press again to turn
off random play.
For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to listen to
the tracks in random, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random on a Six-Disc CD player, do one of the
following:
• To play the tracks on a CD in random order, press
and release the random button. RANDOM ONE
displays. Press again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. A beep sounds and
RANDOM ALL displays. Press again to turn off
random play.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track.
3-94
To scan tracks, press and hold either arrow for more than
two seconds. SCAN displays. The radio goes to the next
track, plays 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.
To scan one CD on a Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
either SEEK arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radio
goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes to
the next track.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD.
Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press to see how long the current
track has been playing. The elapsed time of the track
displays. To change the default on the display, track, or
elapsed time, press until the desired display appears,
then hold the button for two seconds. The radio
produces one beep and the selected display becomes
the default.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD: Press to play a CD while listening to the radio. The
CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select an equalization
setting while playing a CD. The equalization is set while
a CD is played. See “EQ” listed previously for more
information. If an EQ setting is selected for a CD, it is
activated each time a CD is played.
Z (Eject):
Press to eject a CD. Eject is activated
while either the ignition or radio is off. CDs can be
loaded while the ignition and radio is off if this button is
pressed first.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio may have the MP3 CD-R disc
capability feature. For more information, see Using an
MP3 on page 3-97 later in this section.
Using List Mode
The Six-Disc CD player has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD” listed previously in this section for
more information.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song list
mode. LIST should not display. If LIST is displayed,
press the LIST button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the p arrow to locate
the track to be saved. The track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the LIST button to save the track
into memory. When LIST is pressed, one beep
sounds immediately. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the LIST button, TRACK
ADD displays and two beeps sound to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections
are saved.
3-95
To play the song list, press the LIST button. One beep
sounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded tracks
begins to play in the order they were saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track returns to the first
saved track.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on. LIST
displays.
3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired track
to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the LIST button for two seconds.
When LIST is pressed, one beep sounds
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
pressing the LIST button, TRACK DELETE displays
and the radio beeps twice to confirm that the
track has been deleted.
3-96
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on. LIST
displays.
3. Press and hold the LIST button for more than
four seconds. The radio beeps once, followed
by two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
sounds after four seconds. LIST EMPTY displays
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the LIST button. The radio
beeps once and LIST is removed from the display.
CD Messages
Using an MP3
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
MP3 CD-R Disc
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD might not be compatible.
Depending on the radio, see “MP3 Format”
later in this section.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
3-97
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file names, folder names, or playlist names could use
more disc memory space than necessary. To conserve
disc space, keep the length of the file, folder, or
playlist name brief. MP3 CDs do not require file folders.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth.
The depth of the folders should be kept down to make it
easier while locating a folder during playback. All
items over the maximum are ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) always are
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files and the empty
folder does not display.
3-98
No Folder
If a CD has no folder, only compressed files or playlists
are located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions have no function on a CD that
is recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track
from the last folder, play begins again at the first
track of the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display. See
“DISP” later in this section for more information.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of words
on the last page of text, and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, there is no editing
capability. These playlists are treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING DISC displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays.
See “Playing a CD” earlier in this section.
3 N (Repeat): Repeat lets one track, the entire
folder, or playlist be repeated.
Press and release this button until REPEAT TRACK,
REPEAT FOLDER, or REPEAT P-LIST displays.
The current track, folder or playlist continues to repeat.
Press and release this button until REPEAT OFF
displays to turn off repeated play.
4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear tracks
in random, rather than sequential order. The entire
folder, playlist, or CD can be played in random order.
Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOM
FOLDER, RANDOM P-LIST (playlist), or RANDOM
DISC displays. Once all of the tracks in the current folder
or playlist have played, the system moves on to the
next folder or playlist, and plays all of the tracks
in random order.
While in random, pressing and releasing o or p
SEEK arrow takes you to the previous or to the next
random track.
Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOM OFF
displays, to turn off random play.
3-99
5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the previous folder. Press this button
while in random folder mode to go to the previous folder
and randomly play the tracks in that folder.
• Song name and track number mode displays the
6 # (Next Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the next folder. Press this button while in
random folder mode to go to the next folder and
randomly play the tracks in that folder.
• Song and folder mode displays the number of songs
DISP (Display): Press this button to chance between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and ID3 tag. The display
shows only eight characters, but there can be up to four
pages of text. If there are more than eight characters in
the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing this knob
within two seconds goes to the next page of text. If there
are no other pages to be shown, pressing this button
within two seconds goes to the next display mode.
• Song name and time of day mode displays the
current song name and time of day.
• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number the track number and the elapsed
time of the track.
3-100
current song name and track number.
• ID3 Tag and folder mode displays the ID3 tag
information and the folder number.
in the folder and the folder number.
INFO (Information): INFO displays when a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside
the radio for future listening.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required.
No Signal: The vehicle is in a location that is blocking
the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an
open area, the signal should return.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
alternate with the XM™ Radio eight-digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Loading XM: The radio is processing audio and text
data received. No action is needed. This message
should disappear shortly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel. The
system is working properly.
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes,
XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles.
If this message is received after having your vehicle
serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, or
LOCKED could display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
3-101
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this
feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. They
include the following:
> (Mute/OnStar®): Press this button to silence the
system. Press this button again, or any other radio
button, to turn the sound on.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button
for more than two seconds to interact with the
OnStar® system. See the OnStar® System on page 2-43
in this manual for more information.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1™ or XM2™ (if equipped).
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio seeks preset stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
xw (Seek):
Press the seek arrows to go to the next or
to the previous radio station. The radio seeks stations
only with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, play for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either seek arrow again to stop scanning.
While a CD is playing, press the seek arrows to go to the
next or previous track.
3-102
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to go to the next available CD, if multiple
CDs are loaded.
+ x / − x (Volume): Press the plus or minus volume
button to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Frequency interference and static during normal radio
reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers,
vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
3-103
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that the
inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside
surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna
connector at the top-center of the rear window needs to
be properly attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
3-104
Because this antenna is built into the rear window, there
is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes
and vandals.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged and the grid line must be
repaired.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make
sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna. There is enough space between the
lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
will disable vehicle chimes.
3-105
✍ NOTES
3-106
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-7
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-11
Loss of Control .............................................4-12
Driving at Night ............................................4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16
Winter Driving ..............................................4-17
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow ...................................................4-20
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-21
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-21
Towing ..........................................................4-27
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-27
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-27
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-9.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-7, and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
4-3
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
4-4
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-38.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-5
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin. It may also upshift
the transmission to limit wheel spin. You may feel
or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will be displayed
when the system is limiting wheel spin.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow safe use of
the cruise control, it can be used again. See Cruise
Control on page 3-10.
The TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the transmission
only as high as the shift lever position that was chosen,
so use the lower gears only when necessary. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-29.
4-6
This light, along with the
TRACTION CONTROL
OFF message, will display
on the DIC for three
seconds when the TCS is
not on.
If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in the
DIC. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the TCS on. But
you can turn the system off if you ever need to. The TCS
should be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21
and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-20.
To turn the TCS on or off, press the TCS button located
above the radio.
When the TCS is turned off, the TCS warning light will
come on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message on the DIC. It will disappear when the TCS is
turned back on. If the TCS is limiting wheel spin
when the TCS button is pressed, the TCS warning light
will come on and the TCS will turn off right away.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transmission to limit wheel
spin. You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will be displayed
when the system is limiting wheel spin.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow safe use of it,
the cruise control can be used again. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The ETS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the transmission
only as high as the chosen shift lever position, so
use the lower gears only when necessary. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-29.
This warning light, along
with the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message,
will display on the DIC
for three seconds when the
ETS is not on.
If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICE
TRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in the
DIC. When this warning light is on, the system will
not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-7
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the ETS on. But
you can turn the system off if you ever need to. The ETS
should be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in
sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required
To turn the ETS on or off, press the Traction Control
button located above the radio.
When the ETS is turned off, the ETS warning light will
come on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFF
message on the DIC. It will disappear when the ETS is
turned back on. If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when the
traction control button is pressed, the ETS warning light
will come on and the ETS will turn off right away.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle stability
enhancement system called StabiliTrak®. It is an
advanced computer controlled system that assists you
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling.
StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure at any
one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle
in the direction which you are steering.
4-8
When the system activates, a STABILITY CONTROL
ACTIVE message will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58. You may also hear a noise or
feel vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue
to steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, a
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM or STABILITY
CONTROL OFF message will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). A warning light will also
appear on the instrument panel cluster. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58. When this
message is displayed, the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted accordingly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.
For vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, StabiliTrak® can
be turned off by pressing and holding the traction control
button, located above the radio, for approximately five
seconds. A STABILITY CONTROL OFF message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when StabiliTrak® is turned off. StabiliTrak® will remain
off until the traction control button is pressed once to
turn it back on, or until the engine is started.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have antilock
brakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-7, and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
4-9
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as you
can from a possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
4-10
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-11
Loss of Control
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
4-12
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
4-13
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
4-14
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•
•
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-63.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•
•
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date
maps?
4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
4-16
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-63.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-17
A traction system improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even though you have
a traction system, slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the traction system off, such as
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6, Enhanced
Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7, and StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-8.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-18
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-19
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
4-20
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-84.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7,
and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning
before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a
rocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that does
not get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Vehicle Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-21
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post
(striker).
4-22
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds. The vehicle capacity weight
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For
more information on tires and inflation, see Tires on
page 5-63 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 4-28 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
4-23
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-24
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-25
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-26
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-15.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,
you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows
for more information.
4-27
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your
vehicle using a dolly:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the
ignition key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-28
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it has the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the trailering capacity
of your vehicle, read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering
is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
the vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, wheel assembly, and tires are forced to
work harder against the drag of the added weight.
The engine is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.
What is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
Here are some important points:
(1 600 km) the vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
There are three important considerations have to do
with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
4-29
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If
there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or
cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because the
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-21 for more information
about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that is on the vehicle, and the amount
of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight
of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more
information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6
for more information.
4-30
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Here
are some rules to follow:
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
• If holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle to
When using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue
(A) should weigh 10 percent to 15 percent of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. The
correct weight could be achieved simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-21. Be sure not to go over the GVW
limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the
weight of the trailer tongue. If a weight distribution hitch
is used, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit
before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
install a trailer hitch, then be sure to seal the holes
later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not
sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the
exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-37. Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
Chains should always be attached between the vehicle
and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so the rig can be turned.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-31
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, get to know the rig.
Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in
mind that the vehicle is now a good deal longer and not
nearly as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
• If your vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to tap
into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both
brake systems will not work well, or at all.
• Even if your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes, do not tap into your vehicle’s brake system
if the trailer’s brake system will use more than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. If it does, both braking systems
will not work well. You could even lose your brakes.
• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brake
system must not be used with your vehicle.
• If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the upper rear master cylinder
port. But do not use copper tubing for this. If you do,
it will bend and break off. Use steel brake tubing.
4-32
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check the
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can
help avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
More passing distance is needed up ahead when
towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good deal
longer with the trailer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the vehicle you have passed before you
can return to the proper lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a different
turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your
dealer/retailer. The arrows on the instrument panel will
flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. You may think drivers behind you
are seeing your signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
4-33
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long hill or steep downgrade. If the vehicle is not
shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer’s
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
If towing a trailer, you may want to drive in THIRD (3)
instead of DRIVE (D). Shift to a lower gear as needed.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the parking
brake, and shift to PARK (P).
Parking on Hills
5. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
4-34
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• Start the engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle will need service more often when it pulls a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for
more information. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid;
which should not be overfilled; engine oil, drive belt(s),
and cooling and brake systems. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to review
this information before starting on a trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-30.
4-35
✍ NOTES
4-36
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-18
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-21
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25
Engine Coolant .............................................5-27
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29
Pressure Cap ...............................................5-30
Engine Overheating .......................................5-30
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ........................................5-32
Cooling System ............................................5-33
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-43
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-44
Brakes ........................................................5-46
Battery ........................................................5-49
Jump Starting ...............................................5-50
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-56
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-58
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-58
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ...................................5-59
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-61
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-61
Windshield Replacement .................................5-62
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-62
Tires ..............................................................5-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-64
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-67
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-70
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-71
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-73
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77
Buying New Tires .........................................5-78
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82
Tire Chains ..................................................5-84
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-86
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-87
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-88
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-89
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
(Base Model) ............................................5-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
(Super Only) .............................................5-97
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-98
Appearance Care ............................................5-99
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-99
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-100
Leather ......................................................5-101
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces .................................................5-101
Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-102
Weatherstrips .............................................5-102
5-2
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-102
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-103
Finish Care ................................................5-103
Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-104
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ................................................5-104
Tires .........................................................5-105
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-105
Finish Damage ...........................................5-105
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-106
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-106
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-106
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-107
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-107
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-108
Electrical System ..........................................5-108
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-108
Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-109
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-109
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-109
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-109
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-110
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-112
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-116
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-116
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-67.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
•
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-107.
Gasoline Octane
If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VIN Code 2),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
5-5
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 for
additional information.
5-6
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-42. If this occurs, return to your
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described
earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your
Vehicle on page 5-102.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-42.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed if the
fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-58 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-42.
Your vehicle may also have a check gas cap warning
light, which will be displayed on the instrument panel
cluster if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See Check
Gas Cap Light on page 3-49 for more information.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the
Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the interior hood
release handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located to the left of the
steering column below
the instrument panel.
2. Push the secondary hood release lever, located
under the center of the hood above the grille, up
and to the right to disengage it.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure all the filler caps
are properly secured. Pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you will see:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 5-44.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-50.
D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-112.
E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-33.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-43.
H. Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap on
page 5-29.
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
J. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling System
on page 5-33.
K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
M. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-46.
N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, this is what you will see:
5-14
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-44.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-50.
D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.
E. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-112.
F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-33.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap
on page 5-29.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See
Power Steering Fluid on page 5-43.
I. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling System
on page 5-33.
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
M. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to Add
Coolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System on
page 5-33.
N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-46.
O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
5-15
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-16
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-44.
B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.
C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-112.
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-50.
E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-30.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-43.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-18.
I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-46.
K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
L. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 5-33.
5-17
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
3.6L V6 Engine
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
3.8L V6 Engine
5-18
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
5.3L V8 Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-116.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
5-19
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an
oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-20
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by your
warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light or, if your vehicle
has the Driver Information Center (DIC), a CHANGE OIL
SOON message will come on. See Change Engine Oil
Light on page 3-45 or DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-58. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-21
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a
change engine oil light or CHANGE OIL SOON message
being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
• Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC)
1. Press the option button on the DIC until
ENGINE OIL MONITOR appears on the
DIC screen.
2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.
The next screen indicates that the CHANGE
OIL SOON message has been reset.
If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC, when the
gages button is pressed and the OIL
LIFE REMAINING mode appears, it should
read 100 percent OIL LIFE REMAINING.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
5-22
• Vehicles without Driver Information Center (DIC)
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to
ON/RUN.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the
vehicle.
If the light or message comes back on when you start
your vehicle, the oil life system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a
service station, or a local recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do the
following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
3.8L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L Engine similar
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-23
5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through the
slots on the housing. If your vehicle has one of the
V6 engines, a notch on the sides of the filter cover
will indicate the correct engagement.
6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lock
the cover in place.
{CAUTION:
5.3L V8 Engine
1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5-24
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
5-25
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear, pausing for about
three seconds in each one. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission fluid
dipstick handle has this
symbol on it, and is located
near the rear of the engine
compartment.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
crosshatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-26
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the
dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if only DEX-COOL®
extended life coolant is added.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with
engine overheating or if coolant needs to be added to the
radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-30.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® engine coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-27
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® engine coolant which will not
damage aluminum parts. If this coolant mixture is used,
nothing else needs to be added.
{CAUTION:
If coolant needs to be added more than four times a
year, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
5-28
The coolant recovery tank
is located in the engine
compartment toward the
rear of the engine on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
If your vehicles is equipped with the 5.3L engine the
coolant recovery tank is located in the engine
compartment toward the rear of the engine on the driver
side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD FILL line or a little higher. The COLD FILL
line is near the bottom of the recovery tank and has an
arrow pointing down at it.
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-30.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-33.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-29
Pressure Cap
Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light
on the instrument panel cluster that indicate an
overheated engine condition. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-40 and Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on page 3-40 for more
information.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), you will find an ENGINE
COOLANT HOT and a REDUCED POWER STOP
WHEN SAFE message displayed on the DIC. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for more
information.
5-30
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait
until there is no sign of steam or coolant before
you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-32 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-32 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting
and fan speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-31
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN
SAFE message will come on in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), if the vehicle has one, along with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on the
instrument panel, to indicate the vehicle has entered
overheated engine protection operating mode. The
temperature gage will also indicate an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer
in the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.
5-32
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is what
you will see:
3.8L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-33
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-34
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recovery
tank. If it is not, there may be a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-32 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running.
If the fans are not running, the vehicle needs service.
5-35
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-36
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for more information.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at
the COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the cooling system through the
coolant fill neck under the pressure cap, but be sure the
system is cool before you do it.
5-37
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (3.6L V6 Engine)
Notice: The engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause the engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling system
needs to be drained and re-filled, please see the
dealer/retailer.
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose is no longer hot.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.
5-38
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
(3.8L V6 Engine)
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling
system, including the
radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
6. Reinstall the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap.
7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,
you should have your dealer/retailer service
department inspect the vehicle for leaks.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
5-39
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
3. Open the coolant air
bleed valve located on
the thermostat housing,
near the upper
radiator hose.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from the air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valve after the radiator is filled.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
5-40
6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
8. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
10. Then replace the radiator pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at the COLD
FILL line when the engine is cold.
5-41
How to Add Coolant to the Cooling
System (5.3L V8 Engine)
Notice: The engine has a specific cooling system
drain and fill procedure. Failure to follow this
procedure could cause the engine to overheat and
be severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling system
needs to be drained and re-filled, please see the
dealer/retailer.
1. You can remove the
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose is no
longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means that there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.
5-42
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 Engine Coolant
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD
FILL line.
6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and the
pressure cap. After a day or two of driving, when the
engine is cold, check the coolant level in the
recovery tank. If it is low, refill it to the COLD
FILL line.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low, you
should have a dealer/retailer service department
inspect the vehicle for leaks.
5-43
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine or the
5.3L V8 engine, the fluid level should be between the
ADD and HOT marks when the engine is cold, and
at the HOT mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is
at the ADD mark when the engine is cold or hot,
power steering fluid should be added.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the Min (Minimum) and Max
(Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and at the
Max mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
Min mark when the engine is cold or hot, power steering
fluid should be added.
5-44
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid is low, a low washer
fluid light may appear on the instrument panel cluster.
See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on page 3-47
for more information.
In addition, if your vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC), the LOW WASHER FLUID message will
display when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-58 for more information.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-45
Brakes
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, you
should have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not
work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
5-46
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-37.
What to Add
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.
Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-102.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-116.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-47
Brake Pedal Travel
Replacing Brake System Parts
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
5-48
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
If the battery has a very low charge or is dead, you
might not be able to remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting Out
of PARK (P) on page 2-35.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-50 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
5-49
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-50
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If your vehicle has a
V6 engine, to uncover
the remote positive (+)
terminal, press the tab at
the bottom of the fuse block
and lift the cover up.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jump
starting. It has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal, located on the underhood fuse block,
for that purpose. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
location.
3.8L V6 Engine shown,
3.6L V6 Engine
similar
5-51
Always use the remote positive (+) terminal instead
of the positive (+) terminal on the battery.
If your vehicle has the
5.3L V8 engine, to uncover
the remote positive (+)
terminal, remove the fuse
block cover.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
{CAUTION:
5.3L Engine
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has
fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas could be
present.
CAUTION:
5-52
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Attach the
negative cable to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part, other than the ECM, ECM bracket or cables
attached to the ECM bracket.
3.8L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar
5-53
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (–) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5.3L Engine
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with
the good battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-54
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-55
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should:
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
• Have all four tires on a perfectly level surface which
is level all the way to the wall.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being done.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
5-56
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws under
the hood near the headlamps.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
male hex.
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directly
on the headlamp. This allows only the beam of light
from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
5-57
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
male hex.
Bulb Replacement
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-61.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-58
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
To replace a taillamp, turn signal, sidemarker, stoplamp
or back-up lamp bulb:
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the four plastic wing nuts retaining the
trunk trim. There are two wing nuts located on
the driver side (shown) and two located on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
4. Pull back the trunk trim.
5-59
5. Remove the two wing nuts holding the taillamp
assembly in place.
6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect the
wiring harness.
A. Taillamp
B. Back-up
C. Taillamp
D. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal
E. Sidemarker
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Replace with a new bulb.
9. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.
10. Reverse these steps to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-60
License Plate Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Install the new bulb.
1. Remove the screws for either of the license plate
lamps.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamps
Rear Sidemarker, License Plate
Lamp, and Taillamp
Stoplamps and Taillamps
Bulb Number
921
194
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-61
Windshield Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.
If you ever have to have your windshield replaced
be sure to get an acoustic windshield so you will
continue to have the benefits an acoustic windshield
can provide.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13. Here is how to remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up from
the blade connecting point, and pull the blade
assembly down toward the windshield to remove it
from the wiper arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm and
snap the clip into place.
5-62
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
5-63
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-64
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire
or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-98 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 5-86.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
5-65
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
5-66
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70.
5-67
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-21.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-21.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
5-68
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-77.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-21.
5-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-70
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-98.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5-71
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73, for
additional information.
5-72
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
inflation pressure. Vehicles that have the uplevel DIC
buttons can also check tire pressure levels by pressing
the gages button. For additional information and details
about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation
and Displays on page 3-50 and DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-58
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-21, for an example of the Tire
and Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75 and Tires on page 5-63.
If your vehicle has the uplevel Driver Information Center
(DIC), a warning message to check the pressure in a
specific tire displays at the same time the low tire
pressure warning light comes on. The low tire pressure
warning light and the DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-73
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. If your vehicle has the
uplevel Driver Information Center (DIC), A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light should go off
once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS
sensor.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The TPMS malfunction
light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See “TPMS
Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The TPMS malfunction light should go off
when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor
matching process is performed successfully. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
5-74
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The
sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in the
following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front
tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire
using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall.
To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end of
the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage,or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match any
tire and wheel position, the matching process stops and
you need to start over.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, the horn chirps two more times to
signal the tire learning process has ended. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the
TPMS sensor matching process can begin.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, or
until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-77 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-75
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77 and
Wheel Replacement on page 5-82.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-21.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-116.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
5-76
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but
be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-87.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-77
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-64 for
additional information.
5-78
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing most like it did
when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 5-75 for information on
proper tire rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage to
your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-98.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 5-71.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-79
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-80
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-81
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one
side or the other, the alignment might need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
5-82
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-87 for more
information.
5-83
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
CAUTION:
5-84
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions.To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use only
SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
5-85
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-86
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the
jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle
only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-87
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for more
information.
2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.
3. Remove the spare tire cover.
6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise and
remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.
4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the compact spare tire.
5-88
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You vehicle may have wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
If so, go to the Removing the Wheel Nuts section. If the
vehicle has steel wheel covers with plastic nut caps, the
wheel nuts are hidden behind the cap. To remove the
wheel cover:
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-87 for more information.
The tools you will need to change a tire include the
jack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheel
wrench (C).
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheel
nut caps in a counterclockwise direction.
If needed, finish loosening them by hand. The nut
caps will not come off of the wheel cover.
The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so do
not try to remove the cover with your bare hands.
Do not drop the cap or lay it face down, as it could
become scratched or damaged.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have
the flat tire repaired or replaced.
Once you have removed the wheel cover or plastic nut
caps, use the following procedure to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
5-89
Removing the Wheel Nuts
1. Place the wheel wrench securely over the wheel
nut. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
loosen all the wheel nuts, but do no remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jack
lift head.
The front location is about 6.5 inches (16.5 cm)
from the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rear
location is about 9 inches (22.8 cm) from the front
edge of the rear wheel well.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
3. Find the jacking location using the diagram above
and corresponding triangular-shaped hoisting
notches located on the underside of the vehicle’s
plastic molding.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-90
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-91
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-87.
5-92
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
8. Install the compact spare tire.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-93
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-116 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-116 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
5-94
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Base Model)
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-98. Use this
as a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
extension protector, located in the foam holder, to help
avoid wheel surface damage.
5-95
A. Retainer
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Compact Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
G. Extension Protector
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
5-96
Full-Size Flat Tire
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools (Super Only)
Super Model
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
3. Remove the protector and attach the retainer
securely
4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.
When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put the
protector back in the foam holder. When storing the
compact spare tire, the tire must be stored valve
stem down.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
you can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-98. Use this
as a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.
After the compact spare tire has been installed on the
vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.
When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with the
protector, located in the foam holder, to help avoid
wheel surface damage.
To store a full-size tire:
1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunk
area and secure.
2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and the
protector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.
Compact Spare Tire
5-97
A. Retainer
B. Full-Size Flat Tire
C. Protective Guide
D. Extension Bolt Screw
E. Wing Nut
F. Jack
G. Wheel Wrench
H. Foam Holder
I. Bolt Screw
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up
to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and
maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare
tire and its wheel together.
Full-Size Flat Tire
5-98
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
5-99
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-100
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents
to clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-101
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-102
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-106. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-102.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-106.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
5-103
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-104
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-105
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Polishing Cloth
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-106
Description
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Description
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-116 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
5-107
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
This label is in the trunk. It is very helpful if you ever
need to order parts. The label has the following
information:
Add-On Electrical Equipment
•
•
•
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.
5-108
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and
off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and in the fuse block wiring itself. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Make sure a
bad fuse is replaced with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
5-109
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block is located on the
passenger side of the
instrument panel. Pull off
the cover labeled FUSES to
expose the fuse block.
5-110
Fuses
DR/LCK
TRUNK
RFA/MOD
PRK/SWTCH
CLSTR
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
ONSTAR/ALDL
INT/ILLUM
PWR/SEAT
S/ROOF
CNSTR
HVAC
HAZRD
PRK/LAMP
Usage
Fuses
Door Locks, Trunk
CHMSL/BKUP
Remote Keyless Entry
Ignition Key Lock
Cluster
PWR/MIR
CRUISE
RDO/AMP
HTD/SEAT
HTD/MIR
PWR/WNDW
Steering Wheel Controls Illumination
OnStar®, Data Link
Interior Lamps
Power Seat
Sunroof
Canister Vent
Climate Control System
Turn Signal, Hazard
Park Lamps
Relays
RAP
PRK/LAMP
R/DEFOG
Usage
Center-High-Mounted
Stoplamp/Back-up Lamps
Power Mirrors
Cruise Control
Radio, Amplifier
Heated Seats
Heated Mirrors
Power Window
Usage
Retained Accessory Power
Park Lamp Relay
Rear Defogger Relay
5-111
Underhood Fuse Block
Some fuses and relays are located in the underhood fuse
block on the passenger side of the vehicle in the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Mini-Fuses
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3.6L & 3.8L V6 Engines
Mini-Fuses
1
2
5-112
Usage
Driver Side High-Beam
Passenger Side High-Beam
17
18
19
20
21
Usage
Driver Side Low-Beam
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Windshield Wiper
Washer/Regulated Voltage Control
Fog Lamps
Transmission Control Module
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
Auxiliary Power
Horn
Emission
Air Conditioner Clutch
Oxygen Sensor
Powertrain Control Module
Powertrain Control Module,
Electronic Throttle Control
Electronic Throttle Control
Display
Antilock Brake Solenoid
Fuel Injector
Transmission Solenoid
Mini-Fuses
22
23
24
J-Style Fuses
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Micro-Relays
34
35
36
37
Usage
Fuel Pump
Antilock Brake System
Ignition
Usage
Air Pump
Battery Main 1
Battery Main 2
Battery Main 3
Fan 1
Battery Main 4
Antilock Brake System Motor
Fan 2
Starter
Usage
Headlamp High-Beam
Headlamp Driver Module
Fog Lamp
Ignition 1
Micro-Relays
38
39
40
41
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Horn
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Mini-Relays
42
43
44
45
46
48
Usage
Fan 1
Fan 3
Windshield Wiper High
Windshield Wiper
Fan 2
Crank
Fuse Puller
55
Fuse Puller
Diodes
§
Usage
Usage
Air Conditioner Compressor Clutch
Diode
5-113
Fuses
ETC/ECM
A/C CMPRSR
INJ 1
ECM/TCM
5.3L V8 Engine
Fuses
HVAC
FUEL/PUMP
AIRBAG/
DISPLAY
COMPASS
ABS
5-114
Usage
Climate Control System
Fuel Pump
Airbag, Display
Compass
Antilock Brake System
TRANS
EMISSIONS1
ABS SOL
ECM IGN
INJ 2
EMISSIONS2
WPR
AUX PWR
WSW/RVC
LT LO BEAM
RT LO BEAM
FOG LAMPS
LT HI BEAM
Usage
Electronic Throttle Control, Engine
Control Module
Air Conditioning Compressor
Injectors 1
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
Transmission
Emissions 1
Antilock Brake Solenoid
Engine Control Module, Ignition
Injectors 2
Emissions 2
Windshield Wipers
Auxiliary Power
Windshield Washer, Regulated
Voltage Control
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Fog Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Fuses
HORN
RT HI BEAM
BATT 4
BATT 1
STRTR
ABS MTR
BATT 3
BATT 2
FAN 2
FAN 1
Usage
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Battery 4
Battery 1
Starter
Antilock Brake System Motor
Battery 3
Battery 2
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Relays
FUEL/PUMP
A/C CMPRSR
PWR/TRN
STRTR
FAN 3
FAN 2
FAN 1
HDM
Usage
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor
Powertrain
Starter
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Headlamp Driver Module
5-115
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission (Drain and Refill)
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
7.4 qt
7.0 L
3.6L V6 and 3.8L V6 Engine
11.2 qt
10.6 L
5.3L V8 Engine
13.3 qt
12.6 L
3.6L V6 Engine
5.5 qt
5.2 L
3.8L V6 Engine
4.5 qt
4.3 L
5.3L V8 Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
3.8LV6 Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,
VT, NY, MA (see your dealer/retailer for bordering states)
17.0 gal
64.4 L
3.8LV6 Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all other
states (see your dealer/retailer for more information)
17.5 gal
66.2 L
Cooling System Including Reservoir
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
5-116
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
English
Metric
3.6LV6 Engine sold new in all states
Application
17.5 gal
66.2 L
5.3L V8 Engine
17.5 gal
66.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine
7
Automatic
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
3.8L V6 Engine
2
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
5.3 V8 Engine with Active Fuel
Management™
C
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5-117
✍ NOTES
5-118
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
6-2
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-21.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer
to have a qualified technician do the work. See
Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light or CHANGE OIL SOON
DIC message comes on, it means that service is required
for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since the last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
When the light or message appears, certain services,
checks, and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that the
first service be Maintenance I, the second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate Maintenance I
and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light or
message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light or message comes
on 10 months or more since the last service or if the light
or message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-18. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-75 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See
footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (m).
6-6
25,000
(40 000)
•
50,000
(80 000)
•
75,000
(120 000)
•
100,000
(160 000)
•
125,000
(200 000)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-62 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on
page 5-104 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-68.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges
and latches, including those for the body doors,
hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release
pawl, rear compartment, glove box door, and console
door. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
filter may require replacement more often.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or
cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.
6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-70. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-87.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-75.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
Engine Oil
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-18.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
®
Engine Coolant water and use only DEX-COOL
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-27.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
6-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid
Power Steering (GM Part No.
U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Hinges
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
3.6L and 3.8L Engines
15221217
A1614C
5.3L Engine
10350737
A2962C
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6 and 5.3L V8 Engines
89017524
PF48
3.8L V6 Engine
25010792
PF47
15284938
CF132
3.6L V6 Engine
12597464
41-990
3.8L V6 Engine
12568387
41-101
5.3L V8 Engine
12571164
41-985
Driver’s Side
15941735
—
Passenger’s Side
15941736
—
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)
6-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.8L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
6-14
5.3L V8 Engine
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-8
Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10
Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-16
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18
OnStar® ......................................................7-19
Navigation System ........................................7-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your GM dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre by
calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel.
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Buick, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
in the United States, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto
Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps one and two,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
7-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the
following address. Your inquiry should be accompanied
by your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Customer Assistance Offices
Buick encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail Buick, the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
www.Buick.com
1-800-521-7300
1-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-6
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-252-1112;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Buick vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Buick Roadside Assistance
program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving the vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels will not
be provided through this service.
7-8
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To
ensure security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warranty
service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be limited to
six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner
or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling For Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
7-9
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated
on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound
towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting
or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction
devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-10
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day
repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-11
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle
Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
7-12
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
If a Crash Occurs
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-8 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
7-13
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.
In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
7-14
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated
to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even
if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:
Buick Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33136
Detroit, MI 48232-5136
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
7-16
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-17
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have
the special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
See also OnStar® System on page 2-43 in this manual
for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-19
✍ NOTES
7-20
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-67
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-108
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-23
Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-20, 3-24
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-34
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33
Airbag System ................................................ 1-54
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-59
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-57
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-67
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-60
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-60
Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-104
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-105
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-38
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-104
Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-102
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-106
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-103
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100
Finish Care ............................................... 5-103
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-105
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-101
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-99
Leather .................................................... 5-101
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-105
Tires ........................................................ 5-105
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-106
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-102
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-104
Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-20
Audio System ................................................. 3-84
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-102
Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-104
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-105
Radio Reception ........................................ 3-103
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-85
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-101
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-105
1
Audio System(s) .............................................
Automatic Door Lock .......................................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-86
2-12
5-25
2-29
B
Backglass Antenna ........................................ 3-104
Battery .......................................................... 5-49
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-15
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brakes .......................................................... 5-46
System Warning Light .................................. 3-37
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-24
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-58
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-56
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-61
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-61
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 5-59
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-78
2
C
Calibration ..................................................... 3-56
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-116
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-14, 2-37, 4-17, 4-28
Care of
Safety Belts .............................................. 5-102
CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-97
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-53
Center Seat ..................................................... 1-7
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-84
Charging System Light .................................... 3-36
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-42
Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-49
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-106
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41
Older Children ............................................. 1-29
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-47
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ........................................... 1-50
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-39
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-105
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-20
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-104
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-103
Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100
Finish Care ............................................... 5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 5-101
Interior ....................................................... 5-99
Leather .................................................... 5-101
Tires ........................................................ 5-105
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102
Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-102
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-104
Climate Control System ................................... 3-20
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-29
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-24
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28
Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-85
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-98
Compass ....................................................... 3-56
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-20
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-54
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40
Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-40
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-27
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-41
Cooling System .............................................. 5-33
Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-16
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-46
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-52
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-6
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................... 7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-8
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16
3
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................... 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-17
Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-17
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-12
DIC Compass ................................................. 3-56
Diesel
Running Out of Fuel .................................... 2-37
Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-97
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Door
Ajar Light ................................................... 3-47
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12
Locks ........................................................ 2-11
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-50
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-76
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
4
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-13
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-21
Winter ........................................................ 4-17
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-24
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-17
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-108
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-109
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-109
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-110
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-109
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-112
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-109
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-23
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-42
Coolant ...................................................... 5-27
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-27
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-40
Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-40
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-37
Oil ............................................................. 5-18
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-21
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-32
Overheating ................................................ 5-30
Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-46
Starting ...................................................... 2-26
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-7
Warning Light ............................................. 3-39
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-29
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-15
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-23
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-105
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-86
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-87
Flat Tire, Storing ..................................... 5-95, 5-97
Fluid ............................................................. 5-25
Power Steering ........................................... 5-43
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-44
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-8
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-7
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-49
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-48
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-48
Running Out of ........................................... 2-37
5
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .........................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block .......................
Underhood Fuse Block ...............................
Windshield Wiper .......................................
5-109
5-110
5-112
5-109
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40
Fuel .......................................................... 3-48
Speedometer .............................................. 3-32
Tachometer ................................................. 3-32
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-47
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-6
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-52
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-56
Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-109
6
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-58
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System .................................... 3-14
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Suggested Light .......................................... 3-47
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Heater ........................................................... 3-20
Heater ........................................................... 3-24
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-46
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-24
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-70
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Cluster ....................................................... 3-31
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-16
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-50
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Courtesy ....................................................
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ......................
Overhead Console Reading ..........................
Rear Assist Handle Reading ..........................
Lap Belt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...........................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
License Plate Lamps .......................................
5-64
3-16
3-15
3-18
3-18
1-28
1-22
1-41
5-61
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Antilock Brake System Warning .....................
Brake System Warning .................................
Change Engine Oil ......................................
Charging System .........................................
Check Gas Cap ..........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Door Ajar ...................................................
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning .............
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light ..........................................
Headlamps Suggested .................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Low Coolant Warning ...................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Low Washer Fluid Warning ...........................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Reduced Engine Power ................................
Safety Belt Reminders ..................................
Security .....................................................
Service Vehicle Soon ...................................
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Tire Pressure ..............................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..........
Trunk Ajar ..................................................
3-33
3-38
3-37
3-45
3-36
3-49
3-46
3-47
3-40
3-39
3-47
3-46
3-41
3-48
3-47
3-42
3-45
3-34
3-46
3-32
3-45
3-48
3-38
3-41
3-38
3-47
7
Lighting
Delayed Entry ............................................. 3-17
Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-17
Entry ......................................................... 3-16
Perimeter ................................................... 3-17
Theater Dimming ......................................... 3-17
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
Interior Lamps ............................................. 3-16
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-21
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12
Door .......................................................... 2-11
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door ................................................ 2-11
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12
Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-41
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-48
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-47
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
8
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-39
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-39
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-38
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-40
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40
MP3 ............................................................. 3-97
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-24
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-32
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45
Engine ....................................................... 5-18
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-45
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-21
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-43
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-48
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-19
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-40
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-40
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................... 3-18
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-32
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-105
Park Aid ........................................................ 2-41
Park Brake .................................................... 2-32
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35
Parking
Assist ........................................................ 2-41
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-36
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-34
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-29
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-62
Passing ......................................................... 4-11
PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-22
PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-22
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
9
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Power
Door Locks ................................................. 2-11
Electrical System ....................................... 5-109
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-46
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-25
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-43
Windows .................................................... 2-18
Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-30
Privacy .......................................................... 7-17
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-18
Navigation System ....................................... 7-19
OnStar ....................................................... 7-19
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-19
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-12
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-19
Radios .......................................................... 3-84
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-86
Radios
Reception ................................................. 3-103
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-85
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-101
Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................... 3-18
10
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-39
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar® .............................................. 2-39
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-38
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-27
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-46
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ..................................................... 2-5
Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-89
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-88
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-61
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13
Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-62
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-16
United States Government ............................ 7-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-69
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-25
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-8
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-21
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14
Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 2-37
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 5-102
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14
Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-28
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-29
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-27
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
Center Seat .................................................. 1-7
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-8
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-50
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-47
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50
Security Light ................................................. 3-45
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
California Pershlorate Materials
Requirements ............................................ 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-42
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-48
Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-105
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-33
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-35
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................... 5-98
Installing .................................................... 5-89
Removing ................................................... 5-88
Storing ............................................... 5-95, 5-97
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-116
Speedometer .................................................. 3-32
Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-8
11
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-8
Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-26
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-102
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-53
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-54
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-52
Glove Box .................................................. 2-52
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-20
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-19
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-54
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-32
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 5-59
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-38
Theater Dimming ............................................ 3-17
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-101
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-20
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-20
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-22
PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-22
12
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-85
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41
Tires ............................................................. 5-63
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-104
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78
Chains ....................................................... 5-84
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-87
Cleaning ................................................... 5-105
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-98
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-86
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-70
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-75
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-89
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-73
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-71
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-89
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .... 5-95, 5-97
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-64
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-67
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-80
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-27
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-27
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-38
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-7
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-39
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-8
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-29
Trunk ............................................................ 2-14
Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-47
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-47
Operation ................................................... 2-48
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-21
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-48
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-107
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-108
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-76
Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-8
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28
Visors ........................................................... 2-19
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-41
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-80
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-47
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82
Different Size .............................................. 5-80
Replacement ............................................... 5-82
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-39
Windows ....................................................... 2-17
Power ........................................................ 2-18
Windshield
Replacement ............................................... 5-62
Washer ........................................................ 3-9
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-44
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-62
Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-104
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-109
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17
X
XM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-100
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-105
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14
Download PDF

advertising